You are not currently logged in. Are you accessing the unsecure (http) portal? Click here to switch to the secure portal. |
Difference between revisions of "Federico Ghisliero"
(120 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown) | |||
Line 1: | Line 1: | ||
− | {{ | + | {{infobox writer |
| name = [[name::Federico Ghisliero]] | | name = [[name::Federico Ghisliero]] | ||
+ | | image = File:Ghisliero portrait.jpg | ||
+ | | imagesize = 300px | ||
+ | | caption = | ||
+ | | pseudonym = | ||
+ | | birthname = | ||
+ | | birthdate = | ||
+ | | birthplace = | ||
| deathdate = 1619 | | deathdate = 1619 | ||
− | | deathplace = | + | | deathplace = Turino |
− | + | | occupation = [[occupation::Soldier]] | |
− | | occupation = | + | | nationality = |
− | |||
− | |||
− | |||
− | | nationality = | ||
| ethnicity = | | ethnicity = | ||
− | | citizenship = | + | | citizenship = Bologna |
| education = | | education = | ||
| alma_mater = | | alma_mater = | ||
− | | patron = | + | | patron = |
+ | | spouse = | ||
+ | | children = | ||
+ | | relatives = | ||
| period = | | period = | ||
+ | | movement = | ||
+ | | influences = {{plainlist | ||
+ | | [[Camillo Agrippa]] | ||
+ | | [[Giovanni dall'Agocchie]] (?) | ||
+ | | [[Jerónimo Sánchez de Carranza]] (?) | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | | influenced = | ||
+ | |||
| genre = [[Fencing manual]] | | genre = [[Fencing manual]] | ||
− | | | + | | language = [[language::Italian]] |
− | |||
| notableworks = ''[[Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero)|Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii]]'' (1587) | | notableworks = ''[[Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero)|Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii]]'' (1587) | ||
− | | manuscript(s) = | + | | archetype = |
+ | | manuscript(s) = M.A.M. Ghisliero MS (1585) | ||
+ | | principal manuscript(s)= | ||
+ | | first printed edition= | ||
+ | | wiktenauer compilation by=[[Michael Chidester]] | ||
+ | |||
+ | | signature = | ||
+ | | translations = {{English translation|https://msmallridge.files.wordpress.com/2023/07/ghisliero-1587-rules-of-many-knightly-exercises.pdf}} | ||
+ | | below = | ||
}} | }} | ||
− | Federico Ghisliero was a Bolognese soldier and fencer. Little is know about his early life, but he studied fencing under the famous [[ | + | '''Federico Ghisliero''' (Ghislieri; d. 1619) was a Bolognese soldier and fencer. Little is know about his early life, but he came from a Bolognese family and studied fencing under [[Silvio Piccolomini]].<ref>Mentioned on [[Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/10|p. +ⅱ]] of his dedication to Ranuccio and again on [[Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/108|p. 94]].</ref> He lead a long military career that included serving under the famous commander Alessandro, Duke of Parma, in Flanders in 1582. He was also a friend of Galileo Galilei and a prolific writer, though unfortunately most of his writings were destroyed in a fire at the University of Turin in 1904.<ref name="Anglo 30">Anglo 1994, p. 30.</ref> |
+ | |||
+ | In 1587, he published a fencing treatise called ''[[Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero)|Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii]]'' ("Rules for Many Knightly Exercises"); two versions of the book exist, and it's unclear which was created first. One is dedicated to Antonio Pio Bonello, a well-known soldier and distant relative of Ghisliero, and the other to Ranuccio Farnese, who was 18 years old at the time and Alessandro's heir.<ref name="Anglo 30"/> | ||
− | + | Ghisliero's treatise is notable for his use of geometry in relation to fencing, using concentric circles centered on where the fencer has placed most of their weight (often, but not always, the back foot), and sometimes including multiple versions of each figure in an illustration to show the progression of the movements he describes. He also seems to be the first author to reference the ''Vitruvian Man'' in a fencing treatise.<ref>See pp. 7-9. See also Gotti 2023, pp. 130-133.</ref> However, his treatise is unique in that it was printed without any illustrations at all, and they had to be drawn in by hand. It's unclear whether this indicates that he intended to have printing plates made but was unable to do so, or that his plan from the start was to have the books vary based on how much art each buyer was willing to pay for. | |
+ | |||
+ | Ghisliero died in Turino in 1619.<ref name="Anglo 30"/> | ||
{{TOC limit|3}} | {{TOC limit|3}} | ||
== Treatise == | == Treatise == | ||
+ | |||
+ | The illustrations in this presentation are based on the copy in the [[Bibliothèque nationale de France]], but a few have been modified by [[Michael Chidester]] to include additional details present in the [[Biblioteca Universitaria di Bologna]]'s copy in order to offer a single point of reference for the descriptions in the text. The unmodified illustrations can be viewed in the gallery on the [[Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero)|treatise page]]. | ||
{{master begin | {{master begin | ||
Line 34: | Line 61: | ||
}} | }} | ||
{{master subsection begin | {{master subsection begin | ||
− | | title = Antonio Pio Bonello | + | | title = Dedication to Antonio Pio Bonello |
| width = 90em | | width = 90em | ||
}} | }} | ||
Line 41: | Line 68: | ||
! <p>Images</p> | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
− | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[ | + | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Michael Chidester]]</p> |
|- | |- | ||
Line 53: | Line 80: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | <p>'''To the Most Illustrious Lord Antonio Pio Bonello,''' son of the | + | | <p>'''To the Most Illustrious Lord Antonio Pio Bonello,''' son of the Most Excellent Lord Girolamo Bonello, Marquis of Cassano.<br/><br/></p> |
<p>'''F'''or ''two reasons, my Most Illustrious Sir, it has pleased me to direct to Your Most Illustriousness the present book of mine, which I have written here and now, and with good reason, on the use of arms. The first, so that with this new birth of mine I may wish you well, having intercepted with infinite pleasure the marriage which followed between you and the Most Illustrious Lady Octavia Bagliona: with which your Most Illustrious House may hope for a most happy succession: just as I desire that my birth, under the protection of your name, may live for a long time in safety. The other, so that by reading in this book, Your Illustriousness will be able to recognise in it those precepts, which perhaps up to now have been shown to you by a good Master in the handling of arms, your own virtue, which you have wished to adorn with many others in this most tender anchorage of yours. Therefore, let this effort of mine not be discouraging to you: for if it could be weak in itself, nevertheless, by reading it, Your Illustriousness will understand that you will be able to see much more than your own strength and merit would allow. I would like to thank Your Illustriousness for this letter. I kiss your hands.''</p> | <p>'''F'''or ''two reasons, my Most Illustrious Sir, it has pleased me to direct to Your Most Illustriousness the present book of mine, which I have written here and now, and with good reason, on the use of arms. The first, so that with this new birth of mine I may wish you well, having intercepted with infinite pleasure the marriage which followed between you and the Most Illustrious Lady Octavia Bagliona: with which your Most Illustrious House may hope for a most happy succession: just as I desire that my birth, under the protection of your name, may live for a long time in safety. The other, so that by reading in this book, Your Illustriousness will be able to recognise in it those precepts, which perhaps up to now have been shown to you by a good Master in the handling of arms, your own virtue, which you have wished to adorn with many others in this most tender anchorage of yours. Therefore, let this effort of mine not be discouraging to you: for if it could be weak in itself, nevertheless, by reading it, Your Illustriousness will understand that you will be able to see much more than your own strength and merit would allow. I would like to thank Your Illustriousness for this letter. I kiss your hands.''</p> | ||
| | | | ||
− | {{paget|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii|I (alt)|png|lbl=+ⅱ|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii II (alt).png|1|lbl=+ | + | {{paget|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii|I (alt)|png|lbl=+ⅱ|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii II (alt).png|1|lbl=+ⅱ<sup>V</sup>.1|p=1}} |
|- | |- | ||
Line 68: | Line 95: | ||
<p>   Federico Ghisliero. | <p>   Federico Ghisliero. | ||
− | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii II (alt).png|2|lbl=+ | + | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii II (alt).png|2|lbl=+ⅱ<sup>V</sup>.2}} |
|} | |} | ||
Line 74: | Line 101: | ||
{{master subsection begin | {{master subsection begin | ||
− | | title = Ranuccio Farnese | + | | title = Dedication to Ranuccio Farnese |
| width = 90em | | width = 90em | ||
}} | }} | ||
Line 81: | Line 108: | ||
! <p>Images</p> | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
− | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[ | + | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Michael Chidester]]</p> |
|- | |- | ||
Line 97: | Line 124: | ||
<p>'''M'''''ost Gacious<ref>''La gratia'' is Catalan for "grace".</ref> and Serene Lord; when Your Highness reminded me of my service to you in the play of arms, that having worked with you only a little on one occasion; that I owed it to you to gather, almost in compendium, all about Theory and Practice. That I by showing in words, and by working with you struggled to obey you and to explain them. And I did that, not to believe that I will be perfectly aware of the profession of the use of arms (which is not really my profession, but is instead that of the military),<ref>Ghisliero is telling his reader that he is a soldier not a civilian swordsman, so it will have a different perspective to others, hence his later comments on siege craft. [note from Henry Fox]</ref> but by this means to show my gratitude to you. Because while I am deficient in many ways, if I may venture to be very brave, and rejoice very much, I have been noticed by the most illustrious Lord Silvio Piccolomini, for whom, and I hope always to show, that I owe the greatest gratitude to His Highness. How could I ever repay the receipt of this notice from? Even if I did, would I have put enough effort into the following work to warrant further regard from you?''</p> | <p>'''M'''''ost Gacious<ref>''La gratia'' is Catalan for "grace".</ref> and Serene Lord; when Your Highness reminded me of my service to you in the play of arms, that having worked with you only a little on one occasion; that I owed it to you to gather, almost in compendium, all about Theory and Practice. That I by showing in words, and by working with you struggled to obey you and to explain them. And I did that, not to believe that I will be perfectly aware of the profession of the use of arms (which is not really my profession, but is instead that of the military),<ref>Ghisliero is telling his reader that he is a soldier not a civilian swordsman, so it will have a different perspective to others, hence his later comments on siege craft. [note from Henry Fox]</ref> but by this means to show my gratitude to you. Because while I am deficient in many ways, if I may venture to be very brave, and rejoice very much, I have been noticed by the most illustrious Lord Silvio Piccolomini, for whom, and I hope always to show, that I owe the greatest gratitude to His Highness. How could I ever repay the receipt of this notice from? Even if I did, would I have put enough effort into the following work to warrant further regard from you?''</p> | ||
| | | | ||
− | {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|9|lbl=+ⅱ|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/10|1|lbl=+ | + | {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|9|lbl=+ⅱ|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/10|1|lbl=+ⅱ<sup>V</sup>.1|p=1}} |
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
| <p>''I wish to provide you a sign of my loving inclination to you and that I will forever serve you in my life through this work.''</p> | | <p>''I wish to provide you a sign of my loving inclination to you and that I will forever serve you in my life through this work.''</p> | ||
− | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/10|2|lbl=+ | + | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/10|2|lbl=+ⅱ<sup>V</sup>.2}} |
|- | |- | ||
Line 108: | Line 135: | ||
| <p>''I add to this an ardent desire, which I too have together with your other faithful servants. Who is in this first flower of his age to want to provide to you the opportunity, which likewise from me can give you occasion, with this way shown by me, to become accustomed to the exercise: to your profit, and in a way that always protects your life and reassures those who worry about you.''<ref>This and the previous paragraph are commending the work to the patron, justifying the work’s existence and its purpose, common in treatises of the period. [note from Henry Fox]</ref></p> | | <p>''I add to this an ardent desire, which I too have together with your other faithful servants. Who is in this first flower of his age to want to provide to you the opportunity, which likewise from me can give you occasion, with this way shown by me, to become accustomed to the exercise: to your profit, and in a way that always protects your life and reassures those who worry about you.''<ref>This and the previous paragraph are commending the work to the patron, justifying the work’s existence and its purpose, common in treatises of the period. [note from Henry Fox]</ref></p> | ||
| | | | ||
− | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/10|3|lbl=+ | + | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/10|3|lbl=+ⅱ<sup>V</sup>.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/11|1|lbl=+ⅲ.1|p=1}} |
|- | |- | ||
Line 124: | Line 151: | ||
| <p>''Therefore, Your Highness, in response to your kindness, what is most dear to me, and for your own good, this effort of mine to deliver to you the dearest of desires which can be achieved; the preservation of life, and the recreation of the mind.''</p> | | <p>''Therefore, Your Highness, in response to your kindness, what is most dear to me, and for your own good, this effort of mine to deliver to you the dearest of desires which can be achieved; the preservation of life, and the recreation of the mind.''</p> | ||
| | | | ||
− | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/11|4|lbl=+ⅲ.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/12|1|lbl=+ | + | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/11|4|lbl=+ⅲ.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/12|1|lbl=+ⅲ<sup>V</sup>.1|p=1}} |
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
| <p>''And the more willing you are to accept this gift of mine accompanied by very loyal advice (with which you may not always agree) that I do so with the example of the most serene Lord Duke A''<small>LESSANDRO</small>'', your father, which at the same age as Your Highness had spent time on this honourable pursuit and whose great name is well known. While his quality and greatness of name is not yet known to Flanders, all of Italy and almost all of the world is amazed at its incomparable value.''</p> | | <p>''And the more willing you are to accept this gift of mine accompanied by very loyal advice (with which you may not always agree) that I do so with the example of the most serene Lord Duke A''<small>LESSANDRO</small>'', your father, which at the same age as Your Highness had spent time on this honourable pursuit and whose great name is well known. While his quality and greatness of name is not yet known to Flanders, all of Italy and almost all of the world is amazed at its incomparable value.''</p> | ||
− | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/12|2|lbl=+ | + | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/12|2|lbl=+ⅲ<sup>V</sup>.2}} |
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
| <p>''The principles of such greatness in Your Highness will no doubt be reflected in your and everyone hopes to see you walk in his footsteps to be just as great as him.''</p> | | <p>''The principles of such greatness in Your Highness will no doubt be reflected in your and everyone hopes to see you walk in his footsteps to be just as great as him.''</p> | ||
− | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/12|3|lbl=+ | + | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/12|3|lbl=+ⅲ<sup>V</sup>.3}} |
|- | |- | ||
Line 140: | Line 167: | ||
| <p>''I am grateful to be abundantly committed to the serenity of your person and willing to help you through to this end. I kiss your hands with humble reverence.''</p> | | <p>''I am grateful to be abundantly committed to the serenity of your person and willing to help you through to this end. I kiss your hands with humble reverence.''</p> | ||
| | | | ||
− | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/12|4|lbl=+ | + | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/12|4|lbl=+ⅲ<sup>V</sup>.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/13|1|lbl=+ⅳ.1|p=1}} |
|- | |- | ||
Line 175: | Line 202: | ||
| <p>'''Rules of Many Knightly Armies'''</p> | | <p>'''Rules of Many Knightly Armies'''</p> | ||
− | <p>''Collected by Captain Federico Ghisliero, for the service of the Most Serene Lord '' | + | <p>''Collected by Captain Federico Ghisliero, for the service of the Most Serene Lord ''Ranuccio'' Farnese, Prince of Parma, & Piacenza, etc.''<ref>The version dedicated to Antonino instead reads "...for the instruction of the Most Illustrious Lord Antonio Pio Bonello".</ref></p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/15|1|lbl=1}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/15|1|lbl=1}} | ||
Line 324: | Line 351: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| rowspan="4" | [[File:Ghisliero 03.jpg|400px|center]] | | rowspan="4" | [[File:Ghisliero 03.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
− | + | {| style="width: 399px; margin-right: auto; margin-left: auto;" | |
+ | |- | ||
+ | | style="text-align: left; width: 133px;" | ''Prospetiva'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: center; width: 133px;" | ''Scortio'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: right; width: 133px;" | ''Profilo'' | ||
+ | |} | ||
| <p>'''T'''his fencer will have three proportions in his body; his front, his ''scurzo'',<ref>''Scurzo'', does not translate appropriately from Italian. As with a number of words in Ghisliero’s treatise, it is likely a Catalase word or a unique spelling. Analysis of other treaties such as Jarod Kirby’s ''Italian Rapier Combat'' (Kirby, 2004) shows the following two definitions, on page 14 of the text, of a similar sound word that is contextually a more likely approximation of what ''scurzo'' means; “''Scanso'', A voidance, any evasive manoeuvre that moves the body of the direct line” and “''Scanso del pie dritto'', A voidance made by moving the right foot slightly off the direct line while turning the body.” So for the purposes of this translation, scurzo will mean in this text the middle stance as shown in Figure 3, i.e. a partial voiding stance halfway between perspective and profile.</ref> and his profile. When he stands in balance the front always shows the whole surface of the body.</p> | | <p>'''T'''his fencer will have three proportions in his body; his front, his ''scurzo'',<ref>''Scurzo'', does not translate appropriately from Italian. As with a number of words in Ghisliero’s treatise, it is likely a Catalase word or a unique spelling. Analysis of other treaties such as Jarod Kirby’s ''Italian Rapier Combat'' (Kirby, 2004) shows the following two definitions, on page 14 of the text, of a similar sound word that is contextually a more likely approximation of what ''scurzo'' means; “''Scanso'', A voidance, any evasive manoeuvre that moves the body of the direct line” and “''Scanso del pie dritto'', A voidance made by moving the right foot slightly off the direct line while turning the body.” So for the purposes of this translation, scurzo will mean in this text the middle stance as shown in Figure 3, i.e. a partial voiding stance halfway between perspective and profile.</ref> and his profile. When he stands in balance the front always shows the whole surface of the body.</p> | ||
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/26|1|lbl=12.1}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/26|1|lbl=12.1}} | ||
Line 479: | Line 511: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | rowspan=" | + | | rowspan="3" | [[File:Ghisliero 04.jpg|400px|center]] |
| <p>In the first of the two forms [figure 4] the man, when standing in the balance describes a circle around his feet, the center of which he stands perpendicular.</p> | | <p>In the first of the two forms [figure 4] the man, when standing in the balance describes a circle around his feet, the center of which he stands perpendicular.</p> | ||
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/31|8|lbl=17.8}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/31|8|lbl=17.8}} | ||
Line 489: | Line 521: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | + | | <p>'''T'''he first of the four forms of the man, when finds himself in the state of in stillness in the already mentioned position of second; and when his stance is not stable where the bodyweight resides, with one leg in the centre of the circle, it allows other leg to describe the edge of the circle, [this is the position] which we use to keep ourselves on guard.</p> | |
− | | <p> | ||
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/33|1|lbl=19.1}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/33|1|lbl=19.1}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | [[File:Ghisliero 05.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
| class="noline" | <p>The second one, when you take one step, then standing in that quiet step, stopping your other foot from moving describe another circle: through this we enter a with traversal<ref>The act or process of passing across, over, or through.</ref> motion to exit the points: it also forms the third, whereas, the fourth state is what we will enter when the attack is made, and when he moves into the fifth step, as this figure shows, it is what he will use to fight the enemy.</p> | | class="noline" | <p>The second one, when you take one step, then standing in that quiet step, stopping your other foot from moving describe another circle: through this we enter a with traversal<ref>The act or process of passing across, over, or through.</ref> motion to exit the points: it also forms the third, whereas, the fourth state is what we will enter when the attack is made, and when he moves into the fifth step, as this figure shows, it is what he will use to fight the enemy.</p> | ||
| class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/33|2|lbl=19.2}} | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/33|2|lbl=19.2}} | ||
Line 518: | Line 550: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | <p> | + | | <p>'''A'''s the motion, and the matter, around which the man operates in this act of stabbing them, we have to know that movement, according to what Aristotle defends in the ninth text of his fifth book of the ''Physica'',s<ref>Aristotle’s fifth book of the ''Physica'', which considers how motion occurs. “Book V classifies four species of movement, depending on where the opposites are located. Movement categories include quantity (e.g. a change in dimensions, from great to small), quality (as for colours: from pale to dark), place (local movements generally go from up downwards and vice versa), or, more controversially, substance. In fact, substances do not have opposites, so it is inappropriate to say that something properly becomes, from not-man, man: generation and corruption are not kinesis in the full sense.” (Aristotle, ''Physica'' (Book 5), (384–322 BC) 2007) “Generally things which come to be, come to be in different ways: (1) by change of shape, as a statue; (2) by addition, as things which grow; (3) by taking away, as the Hermes from the stone; (4) by putting together, as a house; (5) by alteration, as things which ‘turn’ in respect of their material substance.” Book 1, ''Physica'', Aristotle (Aristotle, ''Physica'' (Book 1), (384-322 BC) 2007)</ref> is a mutation, or transmutation: the types of which some want to be six; i.e. Generation, Corruption,<ref>Change of shape.</ref> Augmentation,<ref>By addition or by growing.</ref> Decreasing,<ref>Also taking away or removing.</ref> Alteration,<ref>Putting things together or building.</ref> and Mutation<ref>Change of material substance or alteration of its substance.</ref> place-to-place. None other than Aristotle himself in the first section<ref>“Three kinds of motion - qualitative, quantitative, and local” Book 5, ''Physica'', Aristotle (Aristotle, ''Physica'' (Book 5), (384–322 BC) 2007)</ref> concludes that there are no more than three [types of movement]; i.e. quantity, quality mutation, and location. Of these three types the last type is what we need to know for our art, in which movement is nothing more than transmutation that sometimes causes a body to move from one place to another; and the terms of the movement are two instants.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/35|2|lbl=21.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/35|2|lbl=21.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | <p>The instant in motion and the instant in time is, the Geometric bridge that is counted in magnitude; that is; which is not [just a] part, but is indisible [to it], and consequently is neither motion nor tempo, but it is the beginning and end of every movement and of each time it is finished; as Aristotle describes in the text of the fifth section of book six of the ''Physica''.</p> | + | | <p>The instant in motion and the instant in time is, the Geometric bridge that is counted in magnitude; that is; which is not [just a] part, but is indisible [to it], and consequently is neither motion nor ''tempo'', but it is the beginning and end of every movement and of each time it is finished; as Aristotle describes in the text of the fifth section of book six of the ''Physica''.</p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/35|3|lbl=21.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/36|1|lbl=22.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/35|3|lbl=21.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/36|1|lbl=22.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 529: | Line 561: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | <p>Movement sits between two stillnesses: and the stillness, true rest, is nothing more than the precondition of movement.<ref>This same concept is present in Chapter 5 ‘Of | + | | <p>Movement sits between two stillnesses: and the stillness, true rest, is nothing more than the precondition of movement.<ref>This same concept is present in Chapter 5 ‘Of ''tempo''’ in [[Ridolfo Capo Ferro da Cagli]]’s 1610 publication ''[[Gran Simulacro dell'Arte e dell'Uso della Scherma (Ridolfo Capo Ferro da Cagli)|Gran Simulacro dell'Arte e dell'Uso della Scherma]]'' and can be translated into the actions of the fencer undertaking the correct movements - from ward (stillness) to attack or defence (movement) to ward (stillness) again. It propounds that the fencer should always end an action in a ward. The same concept is raised in [[Angelo Viggiani dal Montone]]’s 1551 (published 1575) text ''[[Lo Schermo (Angelo Viggiani)|Lo Schermo d'Angelo Viggiani]]'' (Montone, 1575) and [[Antonio Manciolino]]’s 1531 ''[[Opera Nova (Antonio Manciolino)|Opera Nova]]'' (Manciolino, 1531).</ref></p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/36|2|lbl=22.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/36|2|lbl=22.2}} | ||
Line 571: | Line 603: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | <p>The third bearing is named, therefore, not by us pushing or by us pulling but by carrying ourselves forward: yes, like he does when with the sword, still in a proportion with the motion of our body, we bring it to the tempo here and there.</p> | + | | <p>The third bearing is named, therefore, not by us pushing or by us pulling but by carrying ourselves forward: yes, like he does when with the sword, still in a proportion with the motion of our body, we bring it to the ''tempo'' here and there.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/37|2|lbl=23.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/37|2|lbl=23.2}} | ||
Line 605: | Line 637: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | | + | | class="noline" | |
− | | | + | | class="noline" | |
* The fifth and final one made by the man, while the whole body is stable by and centred on the hand’s wrist,<ref>“''Rascetta'', the wrist of one’s hand. Also a kind of fine silke-rash.” (Florio, 1611)</ref> describes the smallest possible circumference that he can describe; which we use to make holes in the knuckles. | * The fifth and final one made by the man, while the whole body is stable by and centred on the hand’s wrist,<ref>“''Rascetta'', the wrist of one’s hand. Also a kind of fine silke-rash.” (Florio, 1611)</ref> describes the smallest possible circumference that he can describe; which we use to make holes in the knuckles. | ||
− | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/38|3|lbl=24.3}} | + | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/38|3|lbl=24.3}} |
|} | |} | ||
Line 630: | Line 662: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | <p> | + | | <p>'''T'''he offensive instrument is the sword, & the dagger is the defensive one and although sometimes the sword makes the dagger’s offering by parrying; and the dagger makes the sword’s offering by attacking, this happens by accident.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/38|5|lbl=24.5}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/38|5|lbl=24.5}} | ||
Line 759: | Line 791: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | | + | | class="noline" | |
− | | <p>The defending line must be used to bring the line opposite to the center from where it originates: but when it finds itself in the center it must be beaten, and when it is not there it must be helped, so that it may arrive more quickly at its decline through natural motion.</p> | + | | class="noline" | <p>The defending line must be used to bring the line opposite to the center from where it originates: but when it finds itself in the center it must be beaten, and when it is not there it must be helped, so that it may arrive more quickly at its decline through natural motion.</p> |
− | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/44|2|lbl=30.2}} | + | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/44|2|lbl=30.2}} |
|} | |} | ||
Line 788: | Line 820: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | <p> | + | | <p>'''T'''he sixth condition, which is the manner in which we offend others and defend ourselves, consists principally in securing our body against the enemy’s offense; and therefore the offense will never be taken if we are not first certain of the defense. Nor will we ever defend ourselves simply, if at the same time we do not offend, for the true defense is to offend, which we will do with resolution; and if we are always the first to execute the attack.<ref>Here Ghisliero’s methods conforms to common Italian approaches of defence to: always counter an opponent’s attacks with consideration for returning the attack, always attack with concern for defence, and not attack unless secure against the opponent’s attack. [note from Henry Fox]</ref></p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/45|1|lbl=31.1}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/45|1|lbl=31.1}} | ||
Line 817: | Line 849: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | rowspan=" | + | | rowspan="6" | [[File:Ghisliero 06''.jpg|400px|center]] |
+ | |||
+ | {| style="width: 400px; margin-right: auto; margin-left: auto;" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | style="text-align: left; width: 133px;" | | ||
+ | | style="text-align: center; width: 133px;" | ''Fendente.'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: right; width: 133px;" | | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | style="text-align: right; width: 133px;" | ''Traversale.'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: center; width: 133px;" | | ||
+ | | style="text-align: left; width: 133px;" | ''Traversale.'' | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | style="text-align: left; width: 133px;" | ''Tondo.'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: center; width: 133px;" | | ||
+ | | style="text-align: right; width: 133px;" | ''Tondo.'' | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | style="text-align: right; width: 133px;" | ''Falso.'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: center; width: 133px;" | | ||
+ | | style="text-align: left; width: 133px;" | ''Falso.'' | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | style="text-align: left; width: 133px;" | | ||
+ | | style="text-align: center; width: 133px;" | ''Montante.'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: right; width: 133px;" | | ||
+ | |} | ||
| <p>Of these three natures of the cut,</p> | | <p>Of these three natures of the cut,</p> | ||
* the first is the ''fendente'',<ref>''Fendente'' means vertical cut.</ref> | * the first is the ''fendente'',<ref>''Fendente'' means vertical cut.</ref> | ||
Line 823: | Line 878: | ||
* the third the ''tondo''.<ref>''Tondo'' – horizontal cut</ref> | * the third the ''tondo''.<ref>''Tondo'' – horizontal cut</ref> | ||
− | <p>And all these three natures are divided into ''dritti''<ref>''Dritti'' – straight/forward [forehand cut, or natural cut, sometimes called ''mandritta''] [note from Henry Fox]</ref> and ''roversi'';<ref>''Roversi'' – reverse [backhand or cross-wise cut] [note from Henry Fox]</ref> the ''dritti'' are those which come from the lesser side. And these ''dritti'' and ''roversi'' divide the circle of man into eight equal parts, as can be seen in the figure below.<ref>The division for the cuts on most diagrams usually go through the navel, or heart rather than the groin in most treatise of the period. [note from Henry Fox] [[Gérard Thibault d'Anvers]]’ 1630 treatise ''[[Academie de l'Espée (Gérard Thibault d'Anvers)|Academie de l'Espée]]'' ‘Book 1 – Tableau/Plate 2 – Comparing the ideal figure to a real Figure; Sword Scabbards’ shows the division at the naval (d'Anvers, ''Academie de l'Espée'', 1630) – in the text it is found in the section that begins ''Pour venir à la Pratique de tout ce qui a efté discouru'', or “To come to the Practice of all that has been discussed” (d'Anvers, ''Academie de l'Espée'' – Book 1 – Tableau/Plate 1 – Philosophical Discussion; Construction and Mathematics of the Circle; Concerning the Sword: Proper Length and Introduction explanation of the first plate., 1630). [[Salvator Fabris | + | <p>And all these three natures are divided into ''dritti''<ref>''Dritti'' – straight/forward [forehand cut, or natural cut, sometimes called ''mandritta''] [note from Henry Fox]</ref> and ''roversi'';<ref>''Roversi'' – reverse [backhand or cross-wise cut] [note from Henry Fox]</ref> the ''dritti'' are those which come from the lesser side. And these ''dritti'' and ''roversi'' divide the circle of man into eight equal parts, as can be seen in the figure below.<ref>The division for the cuts on most diagrams usually go through the navel, or heart rather than the groin in most treatise of the period. [note from Henry Fox] [[Gérard Thibault d'Anvers]]’ 1630 treatise ''[[Academie de l'Espée (Gérard Thibault d'Anvers)|Academie de l'Espée]]'' ‘Book 1 – Tableau/Plate 2 – Comparing the ideal figure to a real Figure; Sword Scabbards’ shows the division at the naval (d'Anvers, ''Academie de l'Espée'', 1630) – in the text it is found in the section that begins ''Pour venir à la Pratique de tout ce qui a efté discouru'', or “To come to the Practice of all that has been discussed” (d'Anvers, ''Academie de l'Espée'' – Book 1 – Tableau/Plate 1 – Philosophical Discussion; Construction and Mathematics of the Circle; Concerning the Sword: Proper Length and Introduction explanation of the first plate., 1630). [[Salvator Fabris]], in his 1606 text, ''[[Scienza d’Arme (Salvator Fabris)|Sienza e Pratica d’Arme]]'' also has an illustration in the section ''Discorso sopra laprima guardia formata nel cauare la spada del fodero'' or “Discourse in the first guard formed in pulling the sword from the scabbard” demonstrates the where cuts should be made and these also shows the division at the navel rather than the groin. (Fabris, 1606)</ref> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/46|3|lbl=32a.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/46|3|lbl=32a.3}} | ||
Line 840: | Line 895: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | |||
| <p>On the other hand, by occupying the imagined line, it does not allow a place for the opposite sword to enter in defense, as is the case with oblique cuts, which are all those lines that follow the angle formed by the line of the ''fendente'' and the ''tondo fendente''.</p> | | <p>On the other hand, by occupying the imagined line, it does not allow a place for the opposite sword to enter in defense, as is the case with oblique cuts, which are all those lines that follow the angle formed by the line of the ''fendente'' and the ''tondo fendente''.</p> | ||
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/48|4|lbl=32b.4}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/48|4|lbl=32b.4}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | |||
| <p>Therefore, the more these transversal cuts approach the perpendicular descent towards the center of the world; and the more they make an acute angle with the line of direction, the more they will approach the perfection of the cut. And on the contrary, the more they move away from it, and approach the horizontal line of the ''diritto tondo'', the less they will make an acute angle; and consequently they will be more oblique; and therefore of less weight and strength.</p> | | <p>Therefore, the more these transversal cuts approach the perpendicular descent towards the center of the world; and the more they make an acute angle with the line of direction, the more they will approach the perfection of the cut. And on the contrary, the more they move away from it, and approach the horizontal line of the ''diritto tondo'', the less they will make an acute angle; and consequently they will be more oblique; and therefore of less weight and strength.</p> | ||
| | | | ||
Line 879: | Line 932: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | | + | | class="noline" | |
− | | <p>''Punta riversa'' is that which parts [wounds] as it departs.</p> | + | | class="noline" | <p>''Punta riversa'' is that which parts [wounds] as it departs.</p> |
− | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/50|3|lbl=34.3}} | + | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/50|3|lbl=34.3}} |
|} | |} | ||
Line 913: | Line 966: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| rowspan="8" | [[File:Ghisliero p35.jpg|400px|center]] | | rowspan="8" | [[File:Ghisliero p35.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
− | | <p>And the two terms, or extremities of the line are two points, as is seen in this example: | + | | <p>And the two terms, or extremities of the line are two points, as is seen in this example:</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/51|2|lbl=35.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/51|2|lbl=35.2}} | ||
Line 921: | Line 974: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | <p>A straight line is one which extends from one point to another with the shortest possible length, and is as follows: | + | | <p>A straight line is one which extends from one point to another with the shortest possible length, and is as follows:</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/51|4|lbl=35.4}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/51|4|lbl=35.4}} | ||
Line 994: | Line 1,047: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | | + | | class="noline" | |
− | | <p>In order to put an end to the seven circumstances, which are involved in all human operations, it remains to know brieflythe end, for which man dies in this action; and this is victory, which being known by itself, there is no need to say any more about it.</p> | + | | class="noline" | <p>In order to put an end to the seven circumstances, which are involved in all human operations, it remains to know brieflythe end, for which man dies in this action; and this is victory, which being known by itself, there is no need to say any more about it.</p> |
− | | | + | | class="noline" | |
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/54|5|lbl=40.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/55|1|lbl=41.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/54|5|lbl=40.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/55|1|lbl=41.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,047: | Line 1,100: | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | | + | | class="noline" | |
− | | <p>And in this way we will consider the line in our operation abstracted from the matter of the sword, when it is not present; but when it is placed in a straight line, then we will consider the line applied to the matter of the sword.</p> | + | | class="noline" | <p>And in this way we will consider the line in our operation abstracted from the matter of the sword, when it is not present; but when it is placed in a straight line, then we will consider the line applied to the matter of the sword.</p> |
− | | | + | | class="noline" | |
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/56|6|lbl=42.6|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/57|1|lbl=43.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/56|6|lbl=42.6|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/57|1|lbl=43.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,067: | Line 1,120: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>''Turning now to other principles, I say to you that, just as in other human operations seven conditions are necessary, so in this particular action of arms the same seven conditions are involved, namely, will, knowledge, measure [distance], time, occasion, place, and weight.''</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/57|2|lbl=43.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/57|2|lbl=43.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>'''T'''he will is the one on which all our actions depend, since all the actions of the powers and of all the limbs are instruments of the will, which is the principal agent. This is in man, like a king who has a principal councillor, according to whose opinion he knows that he must do all things; and this is the intellect. He also has certain other subjects, who are like speculators; if they sometimes succeed in lying: and these are all the external, and internal senses. In addition to these, he has two other subjects, as his lieutenants; who must be ready to await the commands of the King, in order to obey him: which are the cognizable, & the irascible, which are appetitive powers: the office of which is to command the movement of the limbs. Lastly, the King has a minister, who is responsible for the execution of all that is imposed by him or by his lieutenants: and this executioner is the motivating force, who, according to his needs, uses the body and its parts as if they were instruments.</p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/57|3|lbl=43.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/58|1|lbl=44.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/57|3|lbl=43.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/58|1|lbl=44.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,078: | Line 1,131: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>Now, in order to apply this to our purpose, I say that it is necessary that in the act of arms we have the will ready, with all its officials; so that the deadly virtue operates according to what it is going to do: and that it be intent on the attack more quickly than on the parry.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/58|2|lbl=44.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/58|2|lbl=44.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>'''S'''cience is the knowledge of something by its causes: and the question is asked of that thing, from where comes the essence and what is its cause; and by this one can conveniently assign the reason, once it arrives.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/58|3|lbl=44.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/58|3|lbl=44.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And just as in four ways, and no more, one can by reason dispel all doubts as to what effect it may have, or as to the producer of it, or as to the end of it; so there are only four kinds of causes of the effects; that is, the material, the formal, the factual, and the final.<ref>The effect of these causes is the fencer hitting their opponent using the technique. Poor technique means the fencer misses and/or dies.</ref></p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/58|4|lbl=44.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|1|lbl=45.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/58|4|lbl=44.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|1|lbl=45.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,094: | Line 1,147: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>The material cause<ref>The material causes are the movements of the fencer’s body and sword.</ref> is that subject which, being under the form, is never dissolved from it until the form is sound, just as we shall say that motion is an example in these effects of our fencing.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|2|lbl=45.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|2|lbl=45.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>Formal [cause]<ref>The formal cause is how the fencer uses the movements of the material cause.</ref> is that figure, or form, or fulfillment, which gives the intrinsic mode, and being, and appropriateness to that compound, which makes it be, as it is required to be that, of which it is the form: as for example are the proportions of lines.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|3|lbl=45.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|3|lbl=45.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>The factual cause<ref>The factual cause is the fencer, with their measurements and proportions, and their ability to perform the material causes.</ref> is that cause from which comes the principle of that movement, and of that operation, which is necessary to the production of its effect: as for example, of the proportion of the straight line, the man who made it is the factual cause of that.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|4|lbl=45.4}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|4|lbl=45.4}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>The final cause<ref>The final cause is the actual technique the fencer is trying to achieve.</ref> is that usefulness, or rather that apparent good, by which every worker is induced and encouraged to do his work, in order not to work in vain: as can be seen in the example of the straight attack: the apparent good of obtaining victory by means of that attack is the final cause.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|5|lbl=45.5}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|5|lbl=45.5}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>From matter, therefore, and from form, as from intrinsic causes, and proper essential parts, depend all things composed; so artificial, as natural: and likewise from that artificer [creator], who makes them, and from the end, which leads to them, as from extrinsic and external causes, they depend on their production.</p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|6|lbl=45.6|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/60|1|lbl=46.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/59|6|lbl=45.6|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/60|1|lbl=46.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,120: | Line 1,173: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And in whatsoever kind of cause, or mode of that cause, one may consider the cause, as well as the effect. And this sometimes in power, or rather readiness to produce it; sometimes in action; that is to say, in readiness, and aptitude to be able to do it: but we shall not say that man is the actual cause of the said wound, since at present he has not produced it.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/60|2|lbl=46.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/60|2|lbl=46.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>'''T'''he measure [distance]<ref>Measure also often called distance. The measure of something is fluid due to the fencer’s, and their opponent’s, relative proportions in each combat and other considerations regarding weaponry. “The Spanish attempt to make it more certain by using proportionality, measuring against the length of the individual.” [note by Henry Fox] [[Gérard Thibault d'Anvers]] 1628 treatise Academie de l'Espée (d'Anvers, Academie de l'Espée, 1630) “…the Distances and Instances (i.e. steps in the process of fighting) to be observed in training (which are the basic foundations and support for all the following parts) proceed from the proportions of Man, therefore without this same awareness, they cannot be duly comprehended, nor practiced with confidence. And the same goes for the Steps and Approaches, short and long, required by the variety of positions in the performance of these Exercises. From which it is apparent that one must begin with a good knowledge of the proportion of limbs and body parts, that one may at least be able to make some reasonable judgement on the reach of each movement, proportionally to the limb, or limbs, on which the movement depends, and from which it must be continued, ended, turned, returned, released, bound, or changed in a thousand different ways.” (d'Anvers, Academie de l'Espée - – Book 1 – Tableau/Plate 1 –Philosophical Discussion; Construction and Mathematics of the Circle; Concerning the Sword: Proper Length and Introduction explanation of the first plate., 1630)</ref> by which we certify the quantity of the thing, is that quantity of ground, which is between the two combatants: and up to now they have tried to gain more or less knowledge of it by practice. And many have been accustomed to measure themselves, as the Spanish do: which is uncertain.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/60|3|lbl=46.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/60|3|lbl=46.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>But we, wishing to establish a certain and determinate measure [distance], will consider the circle, according to which the body is formed in the first circle: as we have stated above.</p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/60|4|lbl=46.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/61|1|lbl=47.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/60|4|lbl=46.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/61|1|lbl=47.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,136: | Line 1,189: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And if men are unequal in stature, nevertheless, in conformity with their size, they describe the second circle well: and provided that the enemy is greater in height, nevertheless he never exceeds so much that he can increase the advantage held by the one who stands in the first circle.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/61|2|lbl=47.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/61|2|lbl=47.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | | + | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 08.jpg|400px|center]] |
− | | | + | | <p>We therefore conclude that in order for the enemy to reach the center of the circle he must reach the circumference with one of his feet, because the length of the sword, which is two arms long,<ref>Approximately 46 to 50 inches or 117cm to 127cm.</ref> together with the hand and arm, makes a length of three arms,<ref>Approximately 69 to 75 inches or 175cm to 191cm.</ref> which is the distance from the circumference to the center.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/61|3|lbl=47.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/61|3|lbl=47.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | | + | | <p>Hence this fellow, who is in such a state, will be able to open his compasses, and stop his enemy at a distance from his circumference, as far as the opening of his compasses allows: as we see here in this figure.</p> |
− | |||
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/61|4|lbl=47.4}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/61|4|lbl=47.4}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>'''T'''ime is so closely related to, and connected with, motion, from which it can never be separated (for there can be no motion which is not slow or swift; and consequently made in more or less time) that it is necessary that it should be substantially or accidentally connected with motion; that is to say, that it should be one and the same thing; or that it should be an intrinsic accident.<ref>Distance can be measured by Time, and Time measured by Distance so in effect one is the other, and every action toward or away from an opponent is measured in both Time and Distance; he seems to say much the same thing further along. [note by Henry Fox]</ref></p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/63|1|lbl=49.1}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/63|1|lbl=49.1}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>Therefore, since it is clear that if time were motion, it would follow that, just as speed and slowness are conjugated with one, so they would be conjugated with the other: for if it is true to say that this or that motion is either fast or slow, we shall not, nevertheless, call any motion fast or slow, since it is not possible to define anything as being the same: it remains, therefore, that it must at least be an accident.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/63|2|lbl=49.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/63|2|lbl=49.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And since those accidents, by their quantity, make known, and determine the quantity of some subject, they can for this reason be asked to measure that subject.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/63|3|lbl=49.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/63|3|lbl=49.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>''Tempo'' is therefore the number, or rather the measure [distance] of the movement, according to the fact that two instants, one before and the other after, determine the movement of both parties. And there are three times, past, present, and future; of these we need not speak of the past.</p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/63|4|lbl=49.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/64|1|lbl=50.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/63|4|lbl=49.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/64|1|lbl=50.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,172: | Line 1,224: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>The present time in the action of arms cannot be known by us except by accident, when it happens that the opposite operates according to the customs of others; of whom we have knowledge: for, if time is the measure of motion, we cannot have knowledge of such time, if we do not first consider the nature of motion.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/64|2|lbl=50.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/64|2|lbl=50.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>For when motion is made by his own free will, and when the other has to receive motion from him, he will not be able to set himself in motion at the same time that the other begins to move, but he will be able to do so later, and consequently he who first sets himself in motion will finish before the other who has to receive motion from him. Therefore we will not be able to have any knowledge of this measure [distance] of motion, which is called fixed time.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/64|3|lbl=50.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/64|3|lbl=50.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>Since, therefore, we have knowledge of time, we will have to operate in two ways: in the first (since motion is born of stillness) we will consider the nature of the stillness of the enemy’s sword: and the stillness likewise of the enemy’s state: for these will show us future motion; and consequently we will have knowledge of its measure [distance]; that is, of future time, called premeditated [''tempo''].<ref>Aristotelian motion is the consideration of “a stillness and motion” and is used by Capo Ferro as a method of reading the opponent in Chapter 5 ‘Of ''Tempo''’ (Cagli’, 1610) [note by Henry Fox]</ref></p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/64|4|lbl=50.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/65|1|lbl=51.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/64|4|lbl=50.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/65|1|lbl=51.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,188: | Line 1,240: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>In addition to this, we will give the enemy the motion; for which we will require him to make another motion as well; and consequently we will have knowledge of future time.<ref>Obligatory motion is the beginning of second intention. The fencer moves in a particular way so that the opponent has to do something in response, and then the fencer can follow on with their plan. [Note by Henry Fox]</ref></p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/65|2|lbl=51.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/65|2|lbl=51.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>In the meantime, we shall ascertain that the movement which we make in order to impart motion to the enemy should be of short duration, so that it may be completed before the enemy becomes aware of it: and that, if he wishes to injure, he must make a greater movement than we shall make in order to impart motion to him: which will be easy for us if we keep the body together, so that it may immediately obey our will.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/65|3|lbl=51.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/65|3|lbl=51.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>And in order that we may know ''tempo''<ref>I will start using ''tempo'' from this point on instead of time when describing time as a measure of distance, to differentiate between it and the common use of the word time. Following Ghisliero’s explanation of ''tempo'', it will be easier to use ''tempo'' to encapsulate this meaning.</ref> immediately, we shall apply to the motion which we make with our legs the time which is the measure of song or music: and since we may be in a state with our left foot in front when we depart from that stillness, and with our right foot against it as we pass to the fourth circumference, the measure of this motion will be eight beats, which is as important as a maximum.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/65|4|lbl=51.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>With the right foot we can then make four openings, as we have said: and the first is when we find ourselves in the first circle with the right foot in motion, we take the forced step; that is when we reach the fourth circle: that this motion is of four beats, as is a lunge.<ref>Sometimes extended to ''botta lunga'', depending on the author [note by Henry Fox].</ref> We will only use this motion when the enemy is at a distance.</p> | ||
| | | | ||
− | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/65| | + | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/65|5|lbl=51.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|1|lbl=52.1|p=1}} |
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>When we then form the step in force, called an equilateral triangle (of which we use in making the attack) the measure of this motion consists of two beats: which is worth a short [''tempo''].</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|2|lbl=52.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|2|lbl=52.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>The measure of the step formed when the right foot touches the second circumference, which is made in motion, is one measure, which is worth one half-step.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|3|lbl=52.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|3|lbl=52.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>In forming a half-step, we will measure a motion, which will be of half a beat: as is the minimum ''tempo''.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|4|lbl=52.4}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|4|lbl=52.4}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>That small opening of the compass which is made when the body is at its second rest, is a measure of ''tempo'', as is the value of a woman: that two together make a minimum.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|5|lbl=52.5}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|5|lbl=52.5}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>Likewise, in order to give some rule for knowing the time of attacking, I say that it is when the opponent makes some movement, either with the sword alone, or with one of the legs, or with the right or the left, and when they make feints and provocations with the sword: all these movements, whether they be thrusts, or retreats, or turns, or provoking, always attack in those times.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|6|lbl=52.6}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|6|lbl=52.6}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And in three ways we attack, before the time, in the time, and after the time.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|7|lbl=52.7}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|7|lbl=52.7}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>Forward in time it is called attack by premonition:<ref>“Attack into preparation” is what it is called in modern nomenclature, catching the opponent while they are preparing to act. [note by Henry Fox]</ref> and it is when the enemy is stationary with his sword parried, attacking him in that case on the nearest side.</p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|8|lbl=52.8|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|1|lbl=53.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/66|8|lbl=52.8|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|1|lbl=53.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,240: | Line 1,297: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>In time, the enemy is attacked when he is in motion, executing the attack, or parrying: and in such a case he attacks the side which is in motion with the attack, which will be the right side, or the side which is in motion with the defense, which will be the left side.<ref>An action in half-time, because the action is in motion, thus not completed, interrupted. [note by Henry Fox]</ref></p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|2|lbl=53.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|2|lbl=53.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>After the time the attack is made, when the movement is at an end, returning to quietness, and the decline of the attack is followed. It is time to attack, when the sword leaves the imagined straight line, passing through our sight.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|3|lbl=53.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|3|lbl=53.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>'''L'''et all those who know that things must be done in their proper time and place, and never after that. We must therefore consider that, just as it is necessary to wait for it, and to choose it in order to act, so it is also necessary to take care not to let the point pass completely, at which it is good to give the thing we propose: which we call an opportunity, or conjunction; which, when lost, can rarely be regained.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|4|lbl=53.4}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|4|lbl=53.4}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And this occasion is a part of ''tempo'', which has in itself the opportunity to do something suitable. And this is considered in two ways: in the first, when the enemy provokes us with an injury; or when he makes feints or calls on us; or when he gives us a straight line; and in such a case one must not lose the opportunity to injure the enemy.</p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|5|lbl=53.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|1|lbl=54.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/67|5|lbl=53.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|1|lbl=54.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,261: | Line 1,318: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>In the second mode of opportunity is when we ourselves procure it, but in the proper manner, and not in the said terms: which are errors: as we shall learn from what follows.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|2|lbl=54.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|2|lbl=54.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>'''P'''lace is nothing other than the interior and ultimate surface of that body which contains it: which on all sides touches and approaches the ultimate, extrinsic [outward] surface of the body which is contained.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|3|lbl=54.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|3|lbl=54.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>Therefore, for our purpose, the superficial surface of the opposite body will be the one which touches on all sides the extrinsic [outward] and ultimate surface of the sword, which then wounds the body.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|4|lbl=54.4}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|4|lbl=54.4}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And because there are two ways of saying that something is found in this matter; that is to say, a common place of the attack will be the entire surface of the entire body: [but] the proper place will be a part of the surface, which ordinarily is that which lacks defense and which protrudes out the most.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|5|lbl=54.5}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/68|5|lbl=54.5}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And since the center of the body, in all the motions of the same body, is the part which is most immobile, we shall injure that part, as the proper place.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/69|1|lbl=55.1}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/69|1|lbl=55.1}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>'''S'''ince, as we have seen in the composition of man, he has his body composed of four elements, of which the two heavy ones cause the weight in him, which has the power to tend downwards; and also to resist contrary motion. That is to say, to those who would pull him backwards; and since the members of the body serve the will, as instruments of motivating virtue, we will not be able to obey them with the said elements, if the weight is not distributed in them, according to need.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/69|2|lbl=55.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/69|2|lbl=55.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>However, we must know that the weight of the body is distributed between the two columns [legs], and that it can be placed sometimes on one and sometimes on another. But this must be given with reason: since these two columns [legs] are the ends of the pendicular, which is in the middle; and since it is not possible to pass from one end to the other without passing through the middle, it will be necessary for the weight to be transported by these two columns [legs]; just as, if the weight is found on the missing leg, it will be transported to the right side, then it will be necessary first to place it in the middle, that is, in the pendicular, and then to unload it on the right side: and this will likewise be done from the right side to the left.</p> |
| | | | ||
{{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/69|3|lbl=55.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|1|lbl=56.1|p=1}} | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/69|3|lbl=55.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|1|lbl=56.1|p=1}} | ||
Line 1,297: | Line 1,354: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And because the part of the body that has to make any movement, whether it be upright or oblique, will not be able to do so comfortably if it is not relieved of its weight: therefore, the column [leg] that has to stand still, as if it were the leg of a compass, will always support the entire weight, so that the other relieved column [leg] can obey the will, carrying out the movement that will be commanded to do.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|2|lbl=56.2}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|2|lbl=56.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
− | | | + | | <p>And by walking in an orderly manner with natural steps, the weight will be held together in action; so that it may be placed on one of the two legs as needed.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|3|lbl=56.3}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|3|lbl=56.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | | + | | rowspan="3" class="noline" | [[File:Ghisliero 09.jpg|400px|center]] |
− | | | + | | <p>In the same way, if a man wishes to gain ground on the right or left side, he must move by carrying the weight in the middle, and then the weight on the right leg, unloading it, and then gathering the missing leg in the first circle. However, he must never be bound to use both legs to move, except when he is walking.</p> |
| {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|4|lbl=56.4}} | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|4|lbl=56.4}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
+ | | <p>And in order that man may obtain the aforesaid particularity, we must know that the second circle, which he forms in motion, is divided into four right angles with two diameters: and while man is in the first of his circles, that is to say, in balance; and since it is necessary for him to leave, either with his right hand, or with his left hand, or forward, or backward, he will do so by moving only one of his legs, and with the other stable, remaining in the center of the first circle.</p> | ||
| | | | ||
− | + | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|5|lbl=56.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/71|1|lbl=57.1|p=1}} | |
− | |||
− | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/70|5|lbl=56.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/71|1|lbl=57.1|p=1}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
− | | | + | | class="noline" | <p>And it should be noted that while we find ourselves with our feet in the first circle, and that we leave the first circle with a leg, and that we enter the second circle, which is set in motion, then we will divide that second circle into four plane trilateral figures, closed, and contained by three straight lines. And considering each of the three circles by itself, each time that a man is placed in one of them, and wishes to enter into one of the others, he will have to return to the first circle, which is made when stationary: and then, according to need, he will go into one of the four said figures; which is demonstrated by the figure which follows.</p> |
− | | | + | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/71|2|lbl=57.2}} |
− | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/71|2|lbl=57.2}} | ||
|} | |} | ||
{{master subsection end}} | {{master subsection end}} | ||
− | + | ||
{{master subsection begin | {{master subsection begin | ||
| title = Chapter 9 | | title = Chapter 9 | ||
Line 1,336: | Line 1,391: | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>''Since we have declared the seven circumstances which concur in the operation of arms, we must know that in order for an action of ours to be dependent on virtue, it must have four conditions; that is, that it be spontaneous, consulted, chosen and willed.''</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/73|1|lbl=59.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''S'''pontaneously done is understood to mean that we do it of our own free will; and conversely, those actions which we do not do of our own free will can be said not to be spontaneous.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/73|2|lbl=59.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>From this it follows as a rule for us, that a man in the act of arms, will do all his actions voluntarily, being the first to make a firm commitment: and consequently he will act in such a way that his opponent will have to do everything against his will, forcing him to parry.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/73|3|lbl=59.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>Consultation, as Aristotle determined, is about those things which can fall under human counsel.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/73|4|lbl=59.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, in this art of ours, we will well consult all the means that can lead us to our goal, which is victory.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/73|5|lbl=59.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>Election [choice or discrimination] is nothing other than a consent or assent to those things which are placed within us: for since a thing is first consulted and then elected, if it is first consulted and then judged, it will reasonably be elected.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/74|1|lbl=60.1}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>So that from these two conditions, which I have joined together, we shall constitute a rule, that after having consulted the means of offense +& defense, we shall choose the best proportion of injury and defense, and that we shall continually operate.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/74|2|lbl=60.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>Our will is ready to have regard to that end, which is not only truly good, but also apparent: for the acquisition of which we must then spontaneously within ourselves consult the means, which can lead us to it; and those, finally, choosing virtuously to operate; as we shall do in the battle of arms, which is fought from hand to hand. If, having regard to the true good, which in this action is to defend oneself and to offend the enemy, we shall consult and choose those things which we will animously put into execution, which otherwise will annul the whole art of arms. </p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/74|3|lbl=60.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | [[File:Ghisliero 10.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>And since from one point to another there is nothing but a straight line, and since one line is in the subject, the other cannot enter it, since two bodies cannot be in the same space at the same time, it remains that each time that two men come to combat each other, there will necessarily arise a circle of distance: which, starting from its diameter, and each of them forming a point, the one who first puts his sword into the diameter, which consequently becomes the straight line, will force the other to pass through it, so that he will have the offense as well as the defense, since the enemy’s sword will be parallel to his body. And so that this may be better understood, these figures, which follow below, should be well considered.</p> | ||
| | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/74|4|lbl=60.4|p=1}} {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|75|lbl=61|p=1}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''T'''he knowledge of arms being based on this, it has come to pass that the operations of those who have so far dealt with this matter have been various: they have either placed themselves in it, or else they have given the place, so that by parrying the enemy they might at the same time secure themselves by parrying; and by putting their sword in a straight line they might attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/77|1|lbl=63.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>Those who have put their sword forward in a straight line have done so for the aforesaid reason, which is most important; and to keep themselves covered by the sword; and to keep the enemy at a distance: hence there are so, so many ways of gaining it.<ref>This is an important note; the sword is extended and the fencer is covered by the extension of the sword in a straight line. [note from Henry Fox]</ref></p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/77|2|lbl=63.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>And the first, as is the custom in Spain and Italy, is to gain it by dividing the sword into three parts: of which the first, towards the fist, is the ''forte'',<ref>Strongest third of the blade from the hilt toward the middle.</ref> because it is closer to the moving power: and the last is ''debole'',<ref>Strongest third of the blade from the hilt toward the middle.</ref> because it is far from the moving power: but while it is weak in parrying it is very strong in attacking.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/77|3|lbl=63.3}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>Proceeding in this way, one must have placed his sword above that of the enemy in the ''debole'',<ref>Note the positions of the weapons relative to one another. This is consistent with the Aristotelian and the Iberian approaches. [note | ||
+ | from Henry Fox]</ref> keeping his arm gathered, and the fist of his hand placed on the level, or rather a little lower than that of the enemy.<ref>The position of the hand and blade position in this initial stage is vital to the techniques that will follow. [note from Henry Fox]</ref> In such a way that, while waiting for the other hand to release it, at the same time one gains a straight line by extending the arm. As a rule, one should keep in mind that one should go to the sword at one moment, and at the enemy body at another.<ref>This appears to be discussing taking the line or ''stringeri''.</ref></p> | ||
| | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/77|4|lbl=63.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/78|1|lbl=64.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>In defense of this, which I have said, it was customary at the time when the sword was in motion, in order to overcome it, to stop it in said motion, and to free the sword,</p> | ||
+ | * by making a motion with the sword alone, or | ||
+ | * by using the disengaged joust, which is to carry the body from one leg to the other; or | ||
+ | * by withdrawing the left foot behind: and in this way proceeding from hand to hand, one against the other. | ||
+ | <p>But this is more likely to be used as a feint than as a real attack: since men are unequal in size and strength, just as swords are unequal in length and weight, an altered man is unable to discern the minutiae of the game; and since this game is founded on uncertain principles, it will also be uncertain.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/78|2|lbl=64.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>Some of them prevent many of these inconveniences by finding themselves in said line with their swords; when the enemy goes to square them, at that time they carry their swords outside the straight line. When they meet the enemy’s sword out of the straight line, and then, by placing their shoulder on the wall, without separating their sword from the enemy’s, they cross the line with their foot and strike with a ''punta riversa''.<ref>A “reversed thrust” in this instance.</ref></p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/78|3|lbl=64.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>Many of them, having considered that while they were gaining the weakness of the enemy’s sword, they could be attacked at the same time. In drawing their sword from the enemy, kept this order in going to the enemy’s sword, to bring the body towards it, so that if the enemy freed his sword, and attacked, he would find no place to attack: so that in that movement they put their sword into the attack in a straight line.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/79|1|lbl=65.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>But when the enemy’s sword had been raised high, they gave the same opportunity to the enemy, so that he might be attacked. And this they did with certain cuts of the sword with the weapon accompanied, and united, with the same movement of the body with the right hand, or with the left hand; and attacking the enemy they at that time either bound the enemy’s sword with a ''molinello'', and attacked with the dagger; or attacked by putting at that ''tempo'' of his sword in a straight line.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/79|2|lbl=65.2}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>It has also been customary, in order to distract this straight line from its posture, to make feints, either from inside, or from outside with points, or with cuts, in order to frighten that person, who finds himself with his sword ''in presentia'':<ref>‘''in presentia''’ means the sword is on the line of engagement. [Note by Táriq ibn Jelal ibn Ziyadatallah al-Naysábúrí]</ref> so that, coming out of the line with his sword to parry, you would give him a place where he could put his sword into the enemy’s hand. But these people who make these feints first make a mistake in order to make the enemy make another one: which mistakes are then paid for by the loss of life.</p> | ||
| | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/79|3|lbl=65.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/80|1|lbl=66.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>And because he who finds himself in this posture, with every little movement will always maintain the said advantage, if he will always keep the point of his sword fixed in the right shoulder of the enemy; and wherever he will go he will follow it with the said vain hope. Hence many imagined not to retreat from that sword, pressing its weak point, but to overshadow it with their own; and so that they might have some distance to attack, they did so with the short foot in front: and they had to put their foot on the right side of the enemy’s foot, and the sword extended in a straight line to the level of the enemy; and having arrived at a distance, and with the right foot, increasing their wound.<ref>This explains the advantages of Ghisliero’s guard position, demonstrating that the guard is the foundation of a fencing system. [note by Henry Fox]</ref></p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/80|2|lbl=66.2}} | ||
− | |} | + | |- |
− | {{ | + | | |
− | {{ | + | | <p>However, if he places himself in this line, if he makes a single movement with his right foot, he will injure the enemy: because when he is pursued by the enemy, he can be attacked by the ''punta scavizzata''<ref>''Punta scavizzata'' means hollow point.</ref> as it is called by these fencing masters, or by the ''gobba'';<ref>''Gobba'' means hump or hunchback.</ref> and when we provoke him from within, he can be attacked by the ''punta riversa'',<ref>''Puinta riversa'' is a spelling variation from ''punta riversa''.</ref> or by the ''incapocchiato''.<ref>''Incapocchiato'' does not translate, it suggests the word incapacitate. ''Incapocchiársi'' means ‘to become a doult or logger-head, to take a foolish conceite’ (Florio 1611) It might also mean encompassing in modern Italian.</ref></p> |
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/80|3|lbl=66.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Others have based their actions on offense and defense, and have proceeded in various ways; or while the enemy is on guard, they have tried to make a strong blow with a cut, or a thrust, in order to provoke the enemy; so that by disconcerting themselves with the parry, or with the attack, they can parry and then attack.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/80|4|lbl=66.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/81|1|lbl=67.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>That is to say, when they found the sword present, they disconcerted it, either by beating it in its weakness with the true edge at the bottom, or with the false edge from the bottom upwards: so that they could attack at that time: in which way the parries, and attacks are reduced indefinitely: as can be seen in the books which have dealt with this.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/81|2|lbl=67.2}} | ||
− | {{ | + | |- |
− | + | | | |
− | + | | <p>Those who give an uncovered place do so in order to give the enemy an opportunity to attack, so that he may parry and attack; but the feints do great harm to them, and beyond that the same method is reduced indefinitely.</p> | |
− | }} | + | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/81|3|lbl=67.3}} |
− | |||
− | |||
|- | |- | ||
− | + | | | |
− | + | | <p>'''B'''ut we, in order not to incur in these kinds of offences and defences, will not take care to put our sword in a straight line, nor, since there is that of the enemy, will we attempt to draw it in the said terms: on the contrary, we will act according to due reason. And because true science consists in knowing the causes of things; which, once known and removed, the effect is also removed, we shall consider the cause of such a line; which is the point of the enemy’s shoulder, and the point of our body at which the line is aimed: and each time the point of the line is removed from the extremity of our body, the effect of the line is consequently removed.</p> | |
− | + | | | |
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/81|4|lbl=67.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/82|1|lbl=68.1|p=1}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>And this point can be recovered in two ways:</p> | ||
+ | * in the first, by not losing ground; and with the transversal path by going out or to the left; | ||
+ | * in the other, when ground is lost by retreating a step, and by striking the same point. | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/82|2|lbl=68.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>To take the point out of the straight line is done in this way; that is to say, having divided the body into two parts equal to the diameter of our circle, in each part we constitute a point; and of our own free will we place one of them at the extremity of the line; or the enemy is the one who places his sword in one of them. And when of our own free we place it, it will always be the right one, in order to make the attack easier and more comfortable: because in this way we will gain a certain amount of ground.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/82|3|lbl=68.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>When the enemy is the one who puts his sword into one of our two points, if by chance he puts it on the right side, we shall come out with the left foot; if on the left side, we shall come out with the right foot, so that by doing so we remove the effect of the enemy’s line.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/82|4|lbl=68.4}} | ||
|- | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>In addition to annulling the enemy’s line, the re-movement of the forearm creates for us another line, in which, by drawing our sword, we can attack; and in this way our body salutes us, which, by running away from the first attacks...</p> | ||
| | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/82|5|lbl=68.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/83|1|lbl=69.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
| | | | ||
+ | | <p>...on our straight sides, will then withdraw them with a step backwards; and at the same time we will attack his arm: but attacking it on our left side, we will lose the ground with our left foot, and at that time we will attack. But we do not make use of this method, since we could operate in a better way.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/83|2|lbl=69.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 11.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>And since every kind of cause and every kind of object can be considered at times to be in the power of production, and at other times to be in action, so we will consider that line to be in action when it will not be there, but it will be capable of coming to us, since all lines in whatever kind of position they may be, are attacked in a straight line, as can be seen in these figures which follow.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/83|3|lbl=69.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>'''W'''e will distinguish, therefore, that our opponent will either be in one of two states, that is, at rest, or if he departs from that state, he will be in motion.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/85|1|lbl=71.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>While he is at rest, he will keep his sword in a straight line (that is, he will bring it forth) or, having it outside the said line, he will keep it in force [power, strength] to be ready to put it in said line.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/85|2|lbl=71.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When he holds the sword in production (that is, in the straight line) we must consider that, in accordance with the opening of his compasses, the sword will come to the point of the straight shoulder, and consequently the point of our surface will be on the right side of that line: this line will always be called straight, until it reaches the right side of the center of our body.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/85|3|lbl=71.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>While our enemy holds his sword in power to put it in a straight line, it will be called an oblique line; which will either be in front (that is, in the presence) or behind (outside the presence).</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/85|4|lbl=71.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The sword will be said to be oblique in presence in three ways:</p> | ||
+ | * In the first, when it is present in the diameter of our circle, but then lies below the center of our body. | ||
+ | * In the second, the enemy sword will be said to be oblique to our body when both are within the diameter of the circle of distance; and the point of the enemy sword will be outside our body, either high, low, or in whatever kind of proportion we wish: this will be the case when we hold the sword’s fist against its fingers or hands. | ||
+ | * In the third, the opposite sword is oblique to our body, while it forms an angle with the arm, and the point of the sword exceeds the center of our body. | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/85|5|lbl=71.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/86|1|lbl=72.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Outside the present, or behind, the enemy can hold his sword in two ways: either with his right foot forward, or with his left foot. With his right foot he will hold it either low and collected, or high and in the act of striking a blow. When he holds it with his left foot forward, he will either hold it high in a ''guardia di falcone'',<ref>''Guardia di falcone'' means "falcon’s guard". This is what the Bolognese authors call ''guardia alta''. [Note by Táriq ibn Jelal ibn Ziyadatallah al-Naysábúrí]</ref> or low in a guard called by many ''coda lunga e larga''.<ref>''Coda longa, & larga'' or ''coda lunga e larga'' means "long and broad tail guard".</ref></p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/86|2|lbl=72.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And all these lines can be placed in an infinite number of proportions: and therefore it has come about that so many guards have been formed, because from all the principles of the attacks, from all their means, and from all their ends, postures can be formed. But so that we may not be confused, we shall refer only to these proportions, which we have said, in which the enemy will necessarily find himself: it doesn’t much matter whether they are a little higher or a little lower.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/86|3|lbl=72.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''R'''eturning now to the declaration of our art, I say that when the enemy finds himself in any kind of tranquillity in his posture, we must, in order to operate with knowledge, consider the four causes which cause the effects: first of all, the efficient cause, which is man; and this is the most general and remote cause in the action of this posture; but the most propitious and particular will be the act in which man finds himself; and this act shows us the effect which can arise from it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/87|1|lbl=73.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The formal cause, which is motion in general from its stillness, denotes to us the measure of the particular motion, which is to bring it into effect.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/87|2|lbl=73.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The formal cause, which is the proportion of the enemy sword, reveals to us the effect of its attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/87|3|lbl=73.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>I want the final cause to be the one that we consider in this effect around the line of the sword, which in attacking has the purpose of striking our body. But the final cause will be the point on our surface.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/87|4|lbl=73.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And if the enemy finds himself with his sword in a straight line, but subjected to our dagger, as if he were on guard three and four, then, beating that line, and at the same time attacking, we will put our sword in a straight line: but with the sword alone we will come out with the short foot, attacking.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/87|5|lbl=73.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/88|1|lbl=74.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>While the enemy will hold his sword against us in a straight line, in a state of straight foot, or short foot in front, as in guarding the head, or in front of the face, or with the right foot in front of the head in a first and second guard, we will keep as a rule the rule of going out of that straight foot with transversal movement.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/88|2|lbl=74.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When the enemy’s sword is oblique to our body, that is to say, in its first position under the center of our body, we must strike with our left foot in the same position, in order to ''scanso del corpo'',<ref>scanso del corpo means void the body. Basically, these are the body turns we use to take the body off the line of engagement. [Note by Táriq ibn Jelal ibn Ziyadatallah al-Naysábúrí]</ref> and here I am speaking only of the sword, because if we have the dagger, we will place it in the imagined line, and we will strike in our usual manner.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/88|3|lbl=74.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If the enemy’s sword is oblique to our body in the second way (in this case we will see the body of the sword and not its point) we will always gain on our right hand, and escaping that length, and attacking, we will place our sword on the diagonal.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/88|4|lbl=74.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>But if the sword is oblique in the third way, we must distinguish that if the point of the angular line is at the right of our straight point, then we will act against it as if it were in a straight line; but if it were with the tip of the sword in the chest at our short point, we will cut it off, driving our sword in a straight line into the wound.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/88|5|lbl=74.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/89|1|lbl=75.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>In the event that our opponent should hold his sword backwards, or in a fury of presence, with his foot straight forward, as some do when they hold their swords together in order to make the ''inquartata'':<ref>''Inquartata'' means quartering step. It is a voiding action of the body which closes the inside line.</ref> or when they are in ''guardia alta in coda lunga e larga''; or with their foot short forward in a ''guardia di falcone''; or in a ''coda lunga'';<ref>“Long and high tail” guard.</ref> And even if it is finally in any kind of proportion, even if it is out of the present; we will always take care to fight with the body; and we will try to move it with our straight sides, since it is (as Aristotle says) natural to all animals.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/89|2|lbl=75.2}} | ||
|} | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 10 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>''Now, since we have declared the proportions of the lines when they are still, we will say of those that are in motion.''</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/89|3|lbl=75.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''W'''e must therefore consider that they depart from one stillness and come to rest in another:<ref>The sequence of the combatant should always be ward – blow – ward, or stillness – motion – stillness, it is a common and practical method in quite a few treatises. [note from Henry Fox]</ref> for all attacks depart from the center of the shoulder, which is the origin of the straight line; and in the attack they also return to said center.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/89|4|lbl=75.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Because all the motions of a attacked man are mixed; since, for example, in order to make a hit, it is necessary first of all to make a circular motion in order to cause a straight line, and likewise because man, in forming a attack, does so with violent and natural motion (but violent is of greater force than natural), we shall distinguish that motion has a beginning, middle and end.<ref>Examine di Grassi’s (Grassi, 1570) diagram of the thrust and movement of the arm for an example of this motion. [note from Henry Fox]</ref></p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/89|5|lbl=75.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/90|1|lbl=76.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And in order that this treatise may be better understood, I, in this part which follows, postpone the oblique and violent movement which a man makes when he prepares his arm and brings it up and rests it in the state to make a cut or point, if it is time to attack his enemy. However, I intend to speak of the movement that is made when the arm, departing from that stillness, moves towards the attack; and this is that which is (as we have said) composed of violent and natural movement; violent with respect to the force of the moving force, which pushes and violates that weight as it descends; and natural with respect to the weight of the arm and of the sword, which by its nature tends towards the center of the earth.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/90|2|lbl=76.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, the said movement has its weak beginning, which is when it begins to descend: then it has its strong middle, which is when the arm reaches the shoulder level: in which plane is the greatest blow that man can make, because there the violence of man’s strength ends. Finally, there is the end of the force, or less strong, which is when the arm exceeds the plane of the shoulder, because the movement becomes more natural, since the violence ceases, the arm is being helped a little by the rest of the moving power.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/90|3|lbl=76.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/91|1|lbl=77.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And since these three terms are distinguished differently, we must act against each of them: and because the parry is of the lowest order (as far as the sword is concerned) it should not be done: because, since nature does not allow for a vacuum, if one is the first to attack, the motion will always keep the other subject to the parry: so that in two ways we will be shielded from hostile offenses.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/91|2|lbl=77.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the first, if we are at a distance, we will be able to injure at the beginning of the movement, so that we will entertain the opposite: which, when struck (by nature, which repels evil) will not follow once the movement has begun. And this is said to be attacked before time, while the motion is weak.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/91|3|lbl=77.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And we must be very careful that this mode of defense is done resolutely, by putting the body in profile, stretching out, and attacking the straight and hostile sides: and this for as long as the weight of the arm, or that of the moving arm, in that movement, is directed towards the center of the earth.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/91|4|lbl=77.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Moreover, swords which cut and pierce have a different effect from swords which pierce: for if we attack our opponent when his weight is already in decline with the sword, which pierces and passes, we would be well offended, but the enemy could also attack us.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/92|1|lbl=78.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And the reason is this, that if the weight of the body, which was plumb with its diameter on the flat earth’s surface, were removed from the pendulum, and from the point; that is to say, from the stillness: and that the weight were declining at its natural center, it would not be possible to withdraw that weight upwards: since all things hardly move towards the side contrary to its intrinsic inclination.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/92|2|lbl=78.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And in confirmation of this. The soul of man, which is one in itself, cannot at one and the same time be very intent on commanding the movements of his hands and other limbs, and using its senses to learn the pain of injury.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/92|3|lbl=78.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore we conclude that it is excellent to attack the enemy before he has the weight of his body on the ground.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/92|4|lbl=78.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the second way of shielding ourselves from the lines of motion, we can do this in two ways: and in the first, we can lose the ground by moving the point of our body away from it: in the first of the two ways, as we have said, when we lose a step of ground, we will come out straight with the points: and we will injure the opposite arm: or we will pass straight ahead, coming out with the point of presence: and we will also injure the weaving arm. And this is said to be attacked in time in strong motion.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/92|5|lbl=78.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/93|1|lbl=79.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>In the other, the attacks [wounding blows] are allowed to pass through empty spaces [voids]; and as soon as the sword passes through the rays of our vision with the strong attacks [wounding blows], which we find more effective, it attacks itself after a while in weak motion.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/93|2|lbl=79.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 11 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>''But because most men do not have this subtle knowledge of how to offend others, and how to defend themselves: because men, moved by nature,<ref>Nature means their passions.</ref> parry attacks in the middle of their movement; that is, in the strong, when the arm reaches the plane of the shoulder. Therefore, in discussing the parry,<ref>Parate – parade – often later used, especially in smallsword in place of ‘parry’. [note from Henry Fox]</ref> we will choose the best one.''</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/93|3|lbl=79.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''A'''nd it is done in four ways: In the first way, all motions are helped to their declination, because all things, while they are in motion, move more easily than if they were to immediately come out of stillness. And this is done in the following way: if one were to come out of the right line with the right foot; and with the left foot, accompanied by a traverse, one helps any attack, which may come from the right side of the enemy at its declination, and then taking over with the right foot one attacks the side which is closest to us.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/93|4|lbl=79.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/94|1|lbl=80.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Thus, in all attacks which come from the left side of the enemy, as in the case of blows of all three types, and of compound attacks, by exiting from the diameter of the circle towards the enemy’s left side with a transversal cut, we shall help the said lines to descend, and with the least movement we shall attack more easily.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/94|2|lbl=80.2|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the second way of parrying we repulse the enemy’s blows: if he is disconcerted in this way (and this way is good for making the sword fall from the hand of the enemy), as soon as he makes one of the attacks (be they cutting or pointed) which come from the straight sides, we gain ground with the right foot followed by our natural hand of motion, while we seek the enemy’s left hand. And with a ''mezzo mandritto''<ref>''Mezzo mandritto'' means a half-leg cut.</ref> that line at the ''debole''; that is, in the last third towards the point of the sword; and respond with the most convenient attack. | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/94|3|lbl=80.3|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>In the same way, all attacks that come from the left side, with the growth of the short foot, are ''mezzo riverso''<ref>''Mezzo riverso'' means a half-reversed cut.</ref> cut, which slashes towards the ground; and so, with the advance of the right foot, the enemy is wounded.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/94|4|lbl=80.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/95|1|lbl=81.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 12 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>''And well, we say that in addition to this method (since it is useful) there are two other ways to make the sword fall from the hand of the enemy.''</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/95|2|lbl=81.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''I'''n the first, with the sword alone, with the ''Garatusa''<ref>''Garatusa'' is Spanish for thrust. In fencing it is a technique composed of nine movements, and the participation of two and three angles, that they make to [through, from] both parts [locations, sides], from the outside and from the inside, ''arrojando'' the sword with force to the sides, and from there they return to raise it [the sword] to wound with a thrust in the face or chest. It is not safe [sure]. (Ghost Sparrow Publications, 2021)</ref> (as it is called in this way), which is done with a straight cut and with the reverse cut. With these two cuts we neet the last third of the opponent’s sword to cut to the enemy’s hand with a ''mandritto'' or ''riverso'' as our blade falls; and we must try, with a blow from our sword, to make it fall lower than the enemy’s point, and with the hook of the hand cutting the edge of the enemy’s sword. If we then try to use our blow to reach the same level, which only differs in that the point of our sword will be aimed at the enemy’s left hand, and if we use a sharp edge to cut through the false edge of the sword, we will easily achieve our goal.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/95|3|lbl=81.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the second, we place our sword under that of the enemy, and the point of the sword rests on the right arm of the enemy: then, with our dagger placed inwards, we turn it outwards, giving the effect of a leaver: thus causing the sword to fall.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/95|4|lbl=81.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/96|1|lbl=82.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the third way of parrying, one parries all attacks with a true edge; and if one could also parry with a false one, nevertheless, since this parry is weak, we have omitted it. And placing the sword in a straight line, one parries and attacks by running the edge of the sword: and to all proportions of lines made by the right side of the enemy, one parries by guarding the entrance with the left foot, or with the right ahead: and to those, which come from the left side, one parries by turning the good edge to guard the face.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/96|2|lbl=82.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the fourth and last, one parries all attacks by guarding the head; and this method is safer than the third, since it is not subject to deceptions; and with it one responds to that attack which is more comfortable, by receiving the blow in the first third of the sword, in the ''forte'' of the sword; then, gathering up the short foot in the parry, one prepares it for the right; one may attack either by cutting straight on or by cutting ''riverso''.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/96|3|lbl=82.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When someone is strong, he may parry covered, that is, with the sword a little crossed in the strongest part of the sword, and then wound with that attack being made more comfortable following the parry that was made.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/96|4|lbl=82.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>For all these kinds of proportions of lines, which are stationary as well as in motion, since we must overcome them, it will be necessary for us to move with our bodies in four acts, which we will call guards, not because we must remain in them to await the enemy, but in order to hold him, and together to carry out the offense and defense. We shall therefore constitute four guards, since there are four attacks, and four ways of operating, which we shall show in the drawing, each having its own injury [attack].</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/96|5|lbl=82.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/97|1|lbl=83.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''A'''nd the first will be this one, which is seen below; and in which, in order that the body may obey the will, we have chosen the first posture of the body invented by Polyclitus,<ref>Polykleitos's ''Doryphoros'' is an early example of this position called ''contrapposto''. See https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polykleitos for examples of sculptures with this stance. (Wikipeadia, 2021)</ref> which keeps all the weight united in the left leg.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/97|2|lbl=83.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The right foot is relieved of weight, since it is the one that has to enter into motion: & the body is found in the first circle of the four, which it forms in motion: so that in a short time it can turn on all sides.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/97|3|lbl=83.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The operation with the foot straight ahead, as Vegetio says in the eighth chapter, was the custom of the ancient Romans, who, when they threw the pili,<ref>Pili (pilum or pila) was the javelin of which the Romans were armed with two along with their sword. [note by Henry Fox]</ref> kept their left foot ahead so that the blow would be of greater force, and when they used the sword they kept their right foot ahead so that the sides would be covered and the sword would be closer to the enemy.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/97|4|lbl=83.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/98|1|lbl=84.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Of the three proportions of the body in this posture, the curvature is increased, or should we say the view of a face, and half a face, in order to show the enemy the least possible amount of surface. And in order not to allow the enemy only a point, it is this point, in order to remove it from the enemy’s sword, where the body bends forward with its first movement, which it does with the whole body; as we said above; and consequently the sword approaches the opposite point.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/98|2|lbl=84.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 12''.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>And since the sword, while it is in its natural state, denotes the future blow, we will place it in such a proportion that it will be able to make a single attack by the posture of the hand. It should therefore be placed in such a state that, when the body is in ''scurzo'' and the arm is raised in its natural state, the sword and arm form the same line with the body. So that when a line is drawn from the extreme point of the sword, a square figure is formed as shown by the posture.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/98|3|lbl=84.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>In this proportion the sword will be close to the point of contact, because turning only the fist and with it forming an equilateral triangle in motion, the sword will enter in a straight line to attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/98|4|lbl=84.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In his attacks, descending from the circumference to the center in natural motion from top to bottom, he will search the whole body, which is the common place of the attack: and it will be irreparable [harm] because in its motion it forms a semicircle, and because the fist forms an equilateral triangle, so the sword makes three views to the enemy’s eye.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/98|5|lbl=84.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/99|1|lbl=85.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>With this posture the man attacks with the fourth length, which is better than the other three; as we have said, and with a short time he parries, and attacks, and takes his [enemy’s] life.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/99|2|lbl=85.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When we have the dagger, we shall hold it in such a proportion that it can dominate the enemy’s sword, and that from here ours can dominate the enemy’s dagger; or with the left hand we shall be ready to defend.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/99|3|lbl=85.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 13.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>'''W'''e shall nevertheless observe that, being in this posture, we shall be able to enter into the other three; and from one into the other of these, as the need arises, only by moving with one leg and stopping with the other. As, for example, if the enemy sword were to aim at our right point, since according to the precept, once we have removed the point at which the sword is aiming, we will also remove the effect of the other foot by going out into the second circle, which is made in movement, of transversal movement, and unloading the weight of the body on the other leg, we will form the second guard.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/101|1|lbl=87.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>In this second guard, since the right foot has to walk to the attack, it is relieved on the side of its weight; and the sword naturally enters into a position of ''imbroccata''; and the dagger, even though it dominates the enemy sword, is ready for defense: and with the same stroke and length of line it attacks itself, as can be seen in the following figure. </p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/101|2|lbl=87.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 14.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>'''A'''nd because, as has been said, we have divided our body into two equal parts by the diameter of the circle, that is to say, in part straight and in part left, since, as Boethius says in the Book of Divisions, any division is to be of two parts; if the enemy were to place his sword on our left-handed point, we would take that point away from the enemy’s sword with our right foot in a crosswise motion in the second circle: which we do in motion; and ''scurzo formaremo'' with our feet and our body in reverse we shall form the third guard, keeping the arm straight in a state of ''imbroccata'' and the hand well extended; which has the power to close off the enemy’s sword: as we see in this figure.</p> | ||
+ | | {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|103|lbl=89}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>'''I'''f a man is in any one of these three guards, and if, by chance, the enemy should place his sword in the present position, but at an angle, then he will enter the fourth guard by the movement of his right foot alone: if this description, which I will give below, is in itself particular, without the man finding himself in any of the said guards.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/105|1|lbl=91.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The right foot is placed next to the left foot in the first circle with the body in parallel; and by withdrawing the right foot backwards in a straight line through the diameter of the circle; which is formed on the ground, arriving in the third circumference of the third circle with the right foot; the fourth guard is formed, with the whole weight of the body in the right leg.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/105|2|lbl=91.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | [[File:Ghisliero 15.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>In retreating with the right foot one makes a semi-circle with the sword; and this is placed under the crossed arm; which is kept extended, and prone to the defence; and in that strike, which is made with the right foot, one gains with the hind hand a foot of ground, to deceive the enemy; and the body is kept above the right leg to distance it from the enemy. And if one is attacked by the right, because the body is the one that first moves to the front, it does not matter that the weight is in that position. And the posture is this, which follows below.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/105|3|lbl=91.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 13 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Now that we have described''' ''the theorems of this art, it remains for us to demonstrate the practice. But before describing it, since this little digression, which I am about to make, is so much in keeping with our purpose, even if it is to enter into another subject, and since it will give great pleasure to those who will make the profession, and will also serve to increase their understanding, I have decided to deal briefly, and in general, with the offences and defences of fortresses. And only only those that can be applied to our own particular faculties, in order to learn how to defend our own bodies and offend those of the enemy.''</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/107|1|lbl=93.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''S'''ince the fortresses, which were naturally built on strong sites, have become weak through use, man has used his art to devise a plan for building a fortress which would be less subject to the defects which have become apparent through a new way of building.This, with the various order of ''Bellouards''; cauldrons, flattenings, finials, curtains, shoulders, parapets, ramparts, matte houses, buttresses, ditches, and ramparts; and of so many other parts, and membranes, as are seen in the books of Teti, Tartaglia Castriotto, all of whom have dealt with this.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/107|2|lbl=93.2|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/108|1|lbl=94.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>But nature, having formed the body of man in such a measured proportion, as has been said, has likewise constituted in it the fortress composed of the various orders, as we have said, with which the fortresses have been made. He has two hands, like Bellauardi, which defend the ''cortina'',<ref>''Cortina'' means a long wall running level from one bulwark to another.</ref> which is the body; and likewise he has the other parts, as will be seen in the following treatise.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/108|2|lbl=94.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And in order that the fortresses may be impregnable, it would be better if he always held back all his offences in such a way that they would offend the enemy, and in such a way that the latter would not in any way allow them to be approached; which so far it seems has not been found: for the offence is carried out in a straight line: and by that means, by which those on the inside offend the enemies; with it, those outside discover everything.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/108|3|lbl=94.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>As a consequence of this, man’s fortitude must have these two conditions; that is to say:</p> | ||
+ | * one is to keep his offenses free and not subject to the enemy’s offenses | ||
+ | * the other is not to let the enemy come within his distance. | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>We will therefore strive to keep the sword and the dagger not subject to the offence, but out of the way, as has been said, speaking of the first posture for this purpose adopted by the Illustrious Signor Silvio Piccolomini.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/108|4|lbl=94.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And just as a bulwark, when he is deprived of his offences, cannot help and defend the other, nor can he defend the ''cortina'', so each time that one of the hands, which are almost like a bulwark of the man’s ''cortina'', becomes impeded in such a way that it cannot carry out its offence, the other will remain subject to the enemy; and we will remedy this defect if we keep them free (as has been said) and ready for their task.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/109|1|lbl=95.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Not permitting the enemy to approach the ditch is considered by all good soldiers to be the best defence that can be made: because once the ditch is lost, the fortress is said to be half gained. And therefore it is the opinion of good men that every effort should be made to defend the ''strada coperta''.<ref>A ''strada coperta'' is a close walk or passage made on the top of a counter-scarpe in which the besieged may cover themselves from the enemies (Florio 1610)</ref> Which, when it is well made, can easily be defended from the archibuseria;<ref>''Archibuseria'' likely is an alternative spelling of ''archibugiera'', which are a wall with slits, in a fortress, through which a weapon can be fired.</ref> by keeping good soldiers on this wall (who at the right time and in the right place) can make strong attacks on the enemy.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/109|2|lbl=95.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>From this usefulness of keeping the enemy at a distance, we must continually endeavour to ensure that our opponent never comes close to setting foot on the circumference of the second circle; which we form in such a state (as we have said above) as the edge of the ditch of our fortress, by drawing a good distance from the walls: that is to say, from the posture of ''imbroccata aventata'', without opening the compass; and with sorties, extending our legs and entering the fourth circumference; which we form in motion, compressing you in a forced step, (as we have said above) so that with greater length we may prevent the enemy.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/109|3|lbl=95.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/110|1|lbl=96.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The proper time for sorties is when it rains, or if the enemy is exhaused by continuous fighting, or at mealtimes or according to the best judgment of the person who finds himself in the of needing to organise sorties.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/110|2|lbl=96.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Similarly, when the enemy is in motion, we shall attack him by making a sortie in the fourth circumference, because while he is in motion he will not be able to respond with a wounding attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/110|3|lbl=96.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>A part of a good, well-armed soldiery is chosen to undertake the sortie and is secretly taken to the ''strada coperta''. The enemy is suddenly attacked, and then in order that the said soldiery may be secure in its retreat, the walls are armed and use the ''archibuseria'' to defend the soldiery.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/110|4|lbl=96.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the same way, we shall choose the best of the attacks and suddenly wound the enemy; for he, having seen us so far from his body, does not expect such an attack. But in order to be able to retreat in safety, we shall attack him with a ''riverso traversale''<ref>''Riverso traversale'' means a transverse or diagonal blow during retreat. “It’s equivalent to a ''riversa squalembrato'' or ''falso manco'', depending on whether ascending or descending.” [note from Henry Fox]</ref> on the retreat, which we shall make on the way to the ''strada coperta''.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/110|5|lbl=96.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>But the offense, which cannot be carried out against fortresses by day is easily carried out by night by gaining the bulwark [or battlements]. Consequently one arrives at the trench, and because the true offense is that which is carried out when one is sure of not being offended, one must pull the ropes and take the trenches. By this means and by covering oneself, one approaches the trench.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/110|6|lbl=96.6|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/111|1|lbl=97.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>So we, while we are offending our opponent, will always make with our dagger a semi-circle in motion, which will defend our body.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/111|2|lbl=97.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The trench will dominate the corner of bulwark inside and must be attacked so that it will create a trap that the enemy, discovering the will of his opponent, does not have time to [discover] and defend himself.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/111|3|lbl=97.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>So if our enemy tries to dominate us with the sword or the dagger (because our hands, which are our bulwarks, are mobile) we will not allow it. On the contrary, we will continuously dominate our opponent’s sword and dagger so that our body will not be wounded.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/111|4|lbl=97.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 14 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>''Assuming, that our opponent has made the trenches; and that he has approached the pit wishing to enter the fortress with them, it will be convenient to clear the way with the offense.''</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/112|1|lbl=98.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''T'''here are three ways in which fortresses are offended, namely, </p> | ||
+ | * the hidden underground; | ||
+ | * with the battery, the hoe, the shovel, and the stove; or | ||
+ | * with the air; that is, when the cavalry is raised in such a way that those inside cannot appear for defense. | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/112|2|lbl=98.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>There are three ways in which our fortress [body] can be attacked: with low attacks, with middle attacks, and with the others above.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/112|3|lbl=98.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When fortresses are attacked by mines and quarries, the defender tries to recognize the place, which he does with real instruments. For when the lower places are hit, the sign of the movement is given by these instruments; and when the defender is assured of the place, he either cuts off that part of the fortress, detaching it from the whole body of the fortress, or he finds the other part with the same pit, in order to make the mine disappear, and to make it go out; or he tries to destroy it with water or fire.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/112|4|lbl=98.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the same way, when we are offended by low lines, as when the enemy makes an quartered, armoured attack, we will counter them by bending in our belts [sucking in our stomachs]; and we will not allow them to fall into the circle of our body.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/113|1|lbl=99.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Overt attacks on the ground are principally made with artillery, which is used to make a breach and raise the defences, so that the ditch is gained, which can then be attacked with the hoe, shovel and stove.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/113|2|lbl=99.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The artillery should be placed as close as possible to the place where it is to be used, if the site allows it: because the closer the weight of violent motion through the air, the greater the effect it will have on a resisting body, the closer it will be to the driving force, and the greater the effect: and this effect is very important in order to obtain the goal in a short time, which is most valuable in attacking fortresses, as well as being less costly.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/113|3|lbl=99.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, we shall attack as much as possible when the enemy is so far away from us that we are sure to be able to engage him with our strength; for if we begin our offense from a distance, we shall lose time and show contempt, and by uncovering ourselves give the enemy the opportunity to attack us; and when we are a little farther away, we shall advance first with our left foot, and then with our right foot we shall make the attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/113|4|lbl=99.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The greatest effect of the artillery in its strike is when the ball attacks the flat surface of the wall at a right angle, because the diameter of the ball operates entirely in the offense, and when the ball strikes obliquely, part of the diameter touches the wall and part goes empty.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/114|1|lbl=100.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the same way, the attack must be made at a right angle, i.e. we must ensure that the sword in its attack forms a right angle with the flat surface of the body, so that in such a position the sword against us becomes oblique to our body. Furthermore, when the attacks are oblique, they are avoided with every slightest movement of the body and become useless.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/114|2|lbl=100.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The place where the battery is to be made is on the face of one of the bulwarks, since once the defences of the other have been raised, and that side is defended, and those above it, it is safe to walk to the assault.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/114|3|lbl=100.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the same way, we will beat the enemy’s bulwark which will be the hand that is closest to us and consequently we will keep ours far from offense.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/114|4|lbl=100.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Some believe that the ''cortina'' should be beaten, since it is weaker than the bulwark’s flank and face. This is because of its breadth, and because of the space it provides for retreat: for the benefit of which one can stand on horseback with the assailants which is not the case when the ''cortina'' is beaten as there is no place to retreat to, except on the plain; besides which the way is wider. But they do not consider that it would be in the midst of five attacks, of which there are four on each side and one on each front.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/114|5|lbl=100.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/115|1|lbl=101.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore we always seek to attack those parts of the body which are part of the defence. This is why we shall always seek to would the part of the body that is furthest out [from the centre] and nearest to us, for it will be the weakest, as it is in fortresses, and will lack defence.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/115|2|lbl=101.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Since we see that the most defensible part of the wall is the ''cortina'', since the bulwarks are made to defend it, and of this the wall which forms the angle with the flank is the most defensible, we shall always concede to the enemy the point of our ''cortina'', which is the right flank: so that we may find ourselves in a better defence; and we require the enemy to submit to many offences.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/115|3|lbl=101.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, when the enemy wishes to attack at this point, with horizontal attacks, such as thrusts, he will strike the line with the lesser bulwark; and he will attack with the straight line.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/115|4|lbl=101.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And if any one wishes to strike with the left bulwark, he will need to pass the perspective of his body in the straight line he imagined; in which the right bulwark will be seen; and it will be possible to attack him.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/115|5|lbl=101.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Similarly, if we were to attack the right with the same attack we would offend it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/116|1|lbl=102.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''T'''he aerial offence is made when a hill is created on the outside [of the fortress] and with it one stands at a knight’s level [at the same level] with those on the inside. [Those on the inside] cannot appear to the defence because the greatest offence to the ''cortina'' is that this position shows every part inside it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/116|2|lbl=102.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, we will always keep our sword at the enemy’s side, and we will attack them with ''imbroccata aventata''<ref>''Imbroccata aventata'' means a hurling or forceful thrust given over the dagger.</ref> from above and below.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/116|3|lbl=102.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Those on the inside can also defend themselves by rising, if it is possible for them to do so; and by making counter-attack, or they can make a diagonal attack, or they can resolve in by closing the distance quickly. And from here the defenders can try to prevent the enemy from building the hill; or attempt to lay mines prior to the hill being built.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/116|4|lbl=102.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, as the enemy raises his sword, we shall raise our dagger, which must always be directed toward the the opponent’s thrust.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/116|5|lbl=102.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>But returning to the battery, I say that, assuming that the breach has been made with it, a practical soldier should be sent to assess it and consider</p> | ||
+ | * whether the ascent is easy; | ||
+ | * whether the path to be taken is safe; and | ||
+ | * especially whether there are any casemates in the flanks. | ||
+ | <p>And from the inside he must see if the enemy has withdrawn and how all the places can be found inside and from this point, according to the report of that same soldier, the Captain decides [what action to take].</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/116|6|lbl=102.6|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/117|1|lbl=103.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the same way, once we have attacked, we will try to recognize what the enemy is doing [to counter-attack]: since he is enraged by our blow, we are warned to be more ready for the second attack than for the first.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/117|2|lbl=103.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>There are four ways of retreating, all of which have the same effect.</p> | ||
+ | * In the first, a ditch is dug in a straight line, across the whole length of the broken wall: and the ''casematte'' are made in the sides of the ditch with lumber. More rough wood is placed at the tip along with the earth which is dug so the embankment is also made good, prominent, and with the parapet of ''gabionate''.<ref>''Gabionate'' fortifications or fences made of Gabions – cages or baskets full of earth set with ordinance to hide and defend Cannoniers. (Florio 1611)</ref> | ||
+ | * In the second, they are made half-moon style. | ||
+ | * In the third, at an angle. | ||
+ | * In the fourth, with pincers. | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/117|3|lbl=103.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And we must leave as little ground as possible to the enemy, so that he will not have a place to bring and lodge his artillery on it. These retreats are much better, when there is a place for them, than is the stopping of the gap in the breach: because one cannot work except at night; and this too can sometimes be done badly and therefore the shelter will be weak.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/117|4|lbl=103.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/118|1|lbl=104.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Thus, once we have attacked, we will retreat in three steps, always keeping the body in perspective, so that the enemy cannot attack us, while we remain stationary in the distance that our retreat will be at half-moon.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/118|2|lbl=104.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, when the retreats are made as they should be, they are very difficult to gain, because any line that enters a circle is entered by that circle.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/118|3|lbl=104.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, we shall always be in a state of retreat with our body in a semi-circle, necessitating the enemy to come into the middle of our retreat; which will be the sword and dagger placed in our guard. For whatever kind of attack may occur in the middle of our weapons will be parried by the dagger and the enemy will be wounded by our sword.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/118|4|lbl=104.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And when one wishes to enter into such retreats, one must use the French style trench: which is very difficult, & very hard: for when one digs it is necessary to throw oneself on the ground from the sides to cover oneself: & in front of this are placed ''fascinoni; overo tavoloni'': but the ''difenfore aggiustandovi'' a piece of artillery, does great damage. In addition, it itself walks towards the enemy, and tries to repel them with many devices.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/118|5|lbl=104.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/119|1|lbl=105.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Similarly, if our enemy in his despair, should wish to enter our retreat, covering himself with his dagger and sword, we will throw him back and meet him with a decisive attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/119|2|lbl=105.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>But the best thing to do is to seize the enemy by the shoulders, so as to render useless to him all the strength we have built up, by beating again at the back of the retreat; or by walking under cover with a hoe and shovel, which the experienced captain will again remedy by closing off the beaten place with another semi-circle.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/119|3|lbl=105.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In this way, if the enemy wishes to attack us from behind, we will, by means of a semi-circle, close in on him in the midst of our forces, and at that time attack him.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/119|4|lbl=105.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, in this way of attacking and defending, we proceed so far as to reduce them to the extreme; whereupon the defender, by cutting off the offended part, and remaining in isolation, necessitating the the enemy to think of new attacks.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/119|5|lbl=105.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When we are reduced to this end, which will be when we have allowed ourselves to be deceived by the enemy, who will have arrived at our distance, we will lose a step of ground; and we will form a new circle: and thus we will give cause to the enemy to attack us: which we will remedy with our usual parries and attacks.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/119|6|lbl=105.6|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/120|1|lbl=106.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It remains, to complete this treatise, to speak of the assault, which can be carried out:</p> | ||
+ | * with valour and with diligence, | ||
+ | * on arriving with the general camp, and with rapidity, (having first recognised the weakest place) | ||
+ | <p>He plants the pieces to raise the defences and the canons to make the battery and together makes the approaches so that the overwhelmed defender loses his courage and has no time to make his defences.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/120|2|lbl=106.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>As we proceed in this way, we recognize the enemy’s state and the position in which he holds his sword, and we will take him on with speed and resolution to attack him and at the weakest place; that is to say, that part of his body which will be closest to us.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/120|3|lbl=106.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When the assault is made, the General places his whole army in battle in his squares of arms, and places the cavalry at the points where the enemy could attack his army; and those who are ordered to be the first to make the assault enter the trench through the ditches, led by their captains, after whom the standard bearers go out with their banners.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/120|4|lbl=106.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>He then orders the others, who have to help and refresh the assault, to be ready: the Master of the Field of that regiment is responsible for them.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/120|5|lbl=106.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>He then orders the others, who have to help and refresh the assault, to be ready: the Master of the Field of that regiment is responsible for them.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/121|1|lbl=107.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Similarly, from the ''trincerone'',<ref>''Trincerone'' means a large, well-equipped trench.</ref> the musketry and arquebuses are fired, with which the whole ''trincerone'' is armed.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/121|2|lbl=107.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In this way, having arranged the attacks, which, in offending, are defending, the artillery is fired. And under that favour, giving themselves in the drums, they return to the assault. This is then refreshed by the people already commanded to fight hand-to-hand according to need, who, led by the Sergeant-Major to the edge of the ditch, animously assault the fortress.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/121|3|lbl=107.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The defender stands in battle with his men; and with part of them he throws back the attackers. He also does this with the artillery, which is fired at the enemy’s artillery and with other things he helps himself (which I shall not mention here for the sake of brevity) but the best defense is to have the arquebusiers’ continue to fire at each other.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/121|4|lbl=107.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Moreover, he sends soldiers into the ditch so that they can attack the assailants from behind then the soldiers who are in the trenches oppose them and make them retreat.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/121|5|lbl=107.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore our will, which is the Captain General of our army and our fortress, wishing to attack, will do so with diligence and resolution; and will dispose his army in battle, ordering the external sense of sight to look at the coming of the enemy’s line in its extremity: since that should wound the body, and not the hand, as others wish.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/122|1|lbl=108.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Moreover, no matter how little movement the hand makes, the point of the sword makes a much greater movement; therefore, if we look at the hand, we will lose the time to attack, because we will not see in time the angle constituted by the imagined line and the line of the sword.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/122|2|lbl=108.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>He will likewise command the appetitive power, which is desirable and pleasant, to oppose with it those things which impede our end. And to command the motivating power to be on the alert, in order to give motion to our limbs, which will have to be united, so that, when necessary, they may attack and obey the will.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/122|3|lbl=108.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Part of these limbs will go to the attack and part will defend those which will do the offense; as the dagger will do, when it defends the right part of our body which goes to the offense and so doing, we will obtain our end, which will be victory.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/122|4|lbl=108.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>''The end of the Theory.''</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/122|5|lbl=108.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | {{master end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master begin | ||
+ | | title = Practice | ||
+ | | width = 100% | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 1 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''On the Practice'''</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>''Our practice can be reduced to a few things, because by our action we negate all the principles of the various offenses that can be made.''</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/123|1|lbl=109.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''T'''herefore, as soon as the enemy is seen from afar, the cloak should be dropped from the straight shoulder, and the dagger should be thrust forward on the straight flank with the left hand. Then, first, the sword will be drawn from the scabbard, and then the dagger, and at the same time the fists and teeth will be clenched and the eyes widened, showing prideful expression.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/123|2|lbl=109.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>After this, with the lowered arms thrust out from the body, and with natural steps we shall walk; and before we reach the distance we shall acknowledge the enemy; and we shall beware with which foot he comes forward, and with which weapon: for if he holds his dagger forward, this will be to defend himself; if his sword, to attack; however, if he does so in whatever way we choose, it will always be we who will decide and and give him the motion.<p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/123|3|lbl=109.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And supposing that the enemy finds himself in a state with his sword in action in a straight line, but dominable by our dagger, as in the third and fourth guards, we shall place our body in perspective, and in the narrow position we shall enter into the first posture, in which, following the aforesaid rules, we shall be able to attack with a short stroke, and at the same time we shall be able to strike the enemy’s sword, and distort it from that line, helping it to decline.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/123|4|lbl=109.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/124|1|lbl=110.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>For if we consider the four causes which we have mentioned above, the first of which is the posture of the body, we can be certain that the body in motion can come in a straight line, and the proportions of the sword, the formal cause, show us that the attack is in a straight line. The material cause shows us that any other kind of movement that the enemy makes, either with his body or with his arm, either by pushing, or by retreating, or by bearing, or by turning, will be made in a longer ''tempo'' than would be the movement indicated by the posture; the final cause, which is the extreme point of that line, is now removed from the dagger, because the dagger, by beating, takes it away from its position.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/124|2|lbl=110.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And in order that man may not be confused or mistaken, we must know that all the rules we have stated apply equally to the game of the sword and dagger as to that of the single sword: but they differ only in this: that when we have the dagger, and fight against straight lines, which are present, but subject to our dagger, then it is not necessary for us to take out the points, which are the final causes of these lines; for with the dagger we remove the effect of the attack by striking them.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/124|3|lbl=110.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/125|1|lbl=111.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>But with the sword alone, which is devoid of such a defense, when we fight against these proportions of lines, we will always be attacked, and we will do so with our left foot, since we need to remove the point with the movement of our body; since we do not have the dagger: and with our left hand we will close the return to the enemy’s sword, as shown by the two small figures in this first demonstration, which will follow below.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/125|2|lbl=111.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And with the straight lines, in high ''fresentia'',<ref>No translation of this word is available.</ref> with the accompanying weapons and with the sword alone, we will operate in the same way.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/125|3|lbl=111.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When fighting against oblique lines, we shall follow the same order: and only we shall differ in this, that with the sword alone, when we are attacked by necessity; that is, at the time when the enemy is attacking us, we shall do so in a straight line, with the body in profile.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/125|4|lbl=111.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | [[File:Ghisliero 16.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>And returning to the declaration of the Practice, I say that if we find the enemy in the third or fourth guard, either with his legs open or closed, we will present ourselves to him in perspective, and by placing ourselves in first guard with the foot not even in the diameter of the circle, immediately after our sight passes through the ''forte'' of our dagger and attacks the ''debole'' of the enemy’s sword, we will resolutely attack the right side of the sword in ''tempo'': as is shown in this figure, which follows, in which, as in all the others, it is only the guard with his dagger, which is made of will ahead of time: and there is also a certain line drawn from the fist of our posture, which signifies the attacking of necessity in time; that is, the manner of attacking, when the enemy attacks; furthermore that line, which arises from the fist of the opposite, denotes the first posture of the sword of the same enemy.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/125|5|lbl=111.5|p=1}} {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|126|lbl=112|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>I will not hesitate to say that if our enemy was in a state with a straight line in front of him, but well extended, (as many do to keep the enemy at a distance), then we would strike that parried sword with the dagger, describing a semi-circle outwards with it, so that more length could be extracted from our body in the attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/128|1|lbl=114.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''W'''henever our opponent is placed in</p> | ||
+ | * the first or second guard, or | ||
+ | * the guard against the face, or | ||
+ | * in the entrance guard, | ||
+ | <p>the sword will be placed high up in a straight line. We will act against it in this way; we shall place our body in perspective in the first circle, and putting our foot straight ahead in the diameter of the circle, we shall of our own free will oppose the straight point, and with our left hand we shall move out of the circle into the second circle. We shall attack by striking with our dagger using the second guard either in ''tempo'' or ahead of ''tempo''.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/128|2|lbl=114.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And there are three things that could make this contrary operation of ours possible;</p> | ||
+ | * the first is that in the appearance that we make, he could end up walking along that line attacking us, but we will attack him in the premeditated ''tempo''; | ||
+ | * the second is that he could attack us in the movement that we make, when we went out with the point of attacking us: which is not for knowledge; because our movement is of short duration: so that we will have acted first, before he has seen it. | ||
+ | * the third is that he may retreat when we strike the blow in perspective: his retreat will not be so great as our growth, since we are moving together; and in this case we shall attack as we usually do with a forward thrust. | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/128|3|lbl=114.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/129|1|lbl=115.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 17.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>If the enemy changes his guard after the man arrives in the straight, the manner in which he is to be placed will determine how we will proceed against him in accordance with the above rules.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/129|2|lbl=115.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>I have wished to give these few reasons for greater intelligence. It may not be necessary, because all the figures which are to be shown below are based on all the said rules, and this one, which now follows, demonstrates the effect of the second guard, and that line which comes out of the enemy’s shoulder, which signifies the proportion of the sword to the opposite, in which it is supposed to be.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/129|3|lbl=115.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''I'''f the enemy were to be placed in the same guards, but would keep his sword fixed on our left-hand point, we would immediately place our left foot of the same diameter as the right foot that held the enemy in front of us, and then, coming out with our right foot in a transversal movement in the second circle, we would form the third guard, and from above to below we would strike with our cross, leaving the defence to be carried out naturally by our left arm, as if it were one piece, with both hand and dagger.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/131|1|lbl=117.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 18.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>The enemy, when we go to attack, could change his sword underneath; but only by bringing the weight of the body back to the missing<ref>''Manca'' means missing, and probably means back or voided leg.</ref> leg, and with that alone making a small movement, will he beat that sword, and make the same attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/131|2|lbl=117.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>I will not repeat all the reasons, because what has been said of the first guard is also meant to be said of all the straight lines: it is sufficient that these figures demonstrate the effect, as does this one below, which demonstrates how it is done by being attacked before ''tempo'' and in ''tempo''.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/131|3|lbl=117.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | [[File:Ghisliero 19.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>'''B'''ut when the enemy has his sword in preference,<ref>This probably means that the sword has mechanical advantage in a thrusting position.</ref> but obliquely under the center of our body, we will then appear in the united state, and with the body well protected in the first guard, opposing the dagger, a body is resistant to the oblique line, so that it does not rise, we will choose the best attack possible that can be made. But we must prepare ourselves against all the danger that lies in the fact we are approaching the dagger when we strike it, and therefore, with the premeditated ''tempo'' (since the oblique line cannot be used in a short time for anything other than a straight line), we will place our dagger on the imaginary line, on which the sword must fall, and this imagined line appears below in this figure.</p> | ||
+ | | {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|133|lbl=119|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | [[File:Ghisliero 20.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>'''I'''f the enemy were to hold his sword obliquely in the second way, we would immediately, after having reached the diameter (with the body in perspective) enter the smallest circle of distance. [The smallest circle] is marked with dots, as is the other small circle which we also form in the state. And placing our feet on the cord<ref>''Corda'' means rope or cord, but in this context means the diameter of the circle.</ref> of the said large circle we would form the first guard: that thus gaining the distance (in case he attacks). We shall likewise attack, by placing our sword in the diagonal and our dagger in the imagined line; in which that sword must come obliquely, as this figure shows very well, in which we see the effect which our attack makes; and the effect which the enemy’s attack makes.</p> | ||
+ | | {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|135|lbl=121|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | [[File:Ghisliero 21.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>'''T'''he opposite of ours may be found with the sword oblique to our body, in the third way, as has been said of the sword. That is to say, angular, but we shall have ascertained if the extremity of the sword is at the right angle to our left parts; and immediately on arriving at the distance we shall place ourselves in the fourth guard. And we shall attack with the greatest length of the body; moving it first; and then following the movement with the right foot we shall cut that line and we shall help it with the dagger to its circumference. We are certain that the sword, being in this angle, will be able to make a straight line, and that we, by carrying the weight of the body to the missing leg, will overcome it by attacking it on first guard. If, when we appear, the same angular line is made straight, we will return to the first circle on first guard, and we will operate as we have said, on first guard.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/137|1|lbl=123.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>But if the sword is at an angle, and it is placed on the right side of our straight sides, so that in such a position we see its body and not its point, we will go to the first guard, working against it as if it were a straight line.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/137|2|lbl=123.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>The following figure shows very well the effect of the enemy and the effect of our posture.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/137|3|lbl=123.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 2 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 22''''.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>''Now that we have spoken of oblique lines in the present, it remains for us to come to the end of this treatise to discuss those lines, which will be found outside of the present, since the enemy can retreat into them in two ways, either with his right foot forward or with his left.''</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/139|1|lbl=125.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>'''S'''ince we have no intention of attacking our enemy every time that he holds his sword in the rear, the same facilitates our work. And we will keep as a rule that we must spread out from the enemy’s sword as far as it is from us and in doing so we will seek out the enemy’s body, and keeping the body in the rear, we will go out into the smallest part of the circle, and staying in the cord of the said circle, we will attack in front of the ''tempo'' and in ''tempo'' in the same way – as appears here in this figure which follows.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/139|2|lbl=125.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 23.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>'''F'''inally, when the enemy returns to his stationary position with his left foot forward, in this posture he concedes only one point of his surface. However, when he wishes to attack, he must pass with the whole perspective of his body into the attack and this he will do with the greatest possible movement: which will be described in the ''tempo'' of a maxim, which is eight strokes. We shall therefore enter into the distance, placing ourselves in the lesser position to first guard our life, which will be closer to the profile than otherwise; and we shall hold the dagger high if the enemy is on falcon guard.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/141|1|lbl=127.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>While we are doing this, we will move the enemy. We will</p> | ||
+ | * take out the point | ||
+ | * gain distance | ||
+ | * bring our sword closer to the enemy and | ||
+ | * with the dagger ready, which we will hold in such a way that it will dominate the sword, we will attack the enemy either in front of the point or in the point. | ||
+ | <p>In order that this chapter may be better understood, I have divided it and made two demonstrations, of which the first shows that when we attack with the will, then we no longer use our usual attack, but we do so with the body in profile, as we see in the following figure, and we attack the left parts.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/141|2|lbl=127.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="3" | [[File:Ghisliero 24'.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>'''W'''henever we give motion to these, which are in a state of being with the left foot in front, they force themselves to adapt; because by raising the point we cover ourselves behind the line of their body: so that, not discovering a place where they can attack, they move. Therefore it will be time to attack them in that movement, either of the right foot or of the left.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/143|1|lbl=129.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>But if they want to attack, we will, with our usual parry and attack, attack them on the straight side, which is the one that leads to attack, as we see in the following figure.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/143|2|lbl=129.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>'''A'''ll these things, which have been said, we must know how to reproduce, according to need. For if the enemy (for example) can put himself:</p> | ||
+ | * on guard to enter and then lower that line, and | ||
+ | * after that release it, and | ||
+ | * put it in an oblique line | ||
+ | <p>he will likewise be able to put it from one into another proportion. Therefore, by observing these rules, from one guard we will enter the other with great ease.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/145|1|lbl=131.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>So far these considerations have made it clear that being on guard is very harmful. It follows, therefore, that in all our actions we must never give any indication of our will. But we must be resolute enough to place the dagger in the straight line we have imagined and with one stroke attack, either with the point, which will be a forward thrust, or with a slashing cut, with all our strength and length - making it necessary for the enemy to parry. We shall then immediately strike back with a cross-cut, aided by the force of the dagger, after which we shall again begin the first attack; and this cross-cut we shall make standing in the first opening, in step with the force we have used in the attack. But if the enemy loses ground through our first attack, we shall make this cross-cut, increasing with the left foot.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/145|2|lbl=131.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And this way of doing things will be followed, provided that the distance and the attacking are one and the same.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/146|1|lbl=132.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>By putting this resolutely and swiftly, the enemy becomes occupied in defence and moreover he loses his counsel and his spirit, and consequently his strength. From this it is clearly seen that he will put himself in defence or will use some kind of involuntary attack - which are attacks made by necessity. Since we will be the one who forces him to act against his will we will easily resist [his attack] and this all the more so the more they are seen to be weak and imperfect.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/146|2|lbl=132.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | {{master end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master begin | ||
+ | | title = Advertisements of the Sword and Dagger | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Advertisements of the Sword and Dagger'''</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>''If we want to use our first guard, there are five ways in which we could go against this posture: but all will be in vain if we operate according to reason and the knowledge of the weapon.''</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/147|1|lbl=133.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''I'''n the first way, he will try to approach from a distance, and with speed he will move his sword across, in order to attack with his dagger. But this is remedied by attacking the enemy in motion, before he reaches the distance. In addition, with every little movement we raise our sword, we will put it into the attack in a straight line. Moreover, we shall pass with our left foot and attack with our dagger.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/147|2|lbl=133.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the second way, he will study the opposite of going to the sword, in order to attack with the reversed blow: but this is remedied by centring with the right foot: because in this way he will not be allowed to approach: so that in those movements we will be able to attack him; and supposing that he were to dig out the reversed attack, we will drive our sword in a straight line, with the body in profile, thus cutting that line.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/147|3|lbl=133.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/148|1|lbl=134.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the third way, with the low sword tilting, the apposite will be done by the ''inquartata'': and therefore we will move tilting above; and with the dagger we will hold back the sword so that it does not rise.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/148|2|lbl=134.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the fourth way, he will do the opposite, flowing up the sword by the middle, not to attack, but to drive out the ''punta riversa'', which is remedied in the same way.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/148|3|lbl=134.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the fifth way, he will put the point of the sword in his fist to prevent it from descending. We will not allow this if we are attacked immediately after the enemy’s sword reaches our body, but if we assume that the sword is already in our fist, we will make a little sign of retreat with the fist of the sword alone, because if he puts the sword back in that motion we will attack him.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/148|4|lbl=134.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If, in presenting himself, a man is deceived or disconcerted, he must withdraw by drawing a circular slash which cleaves the ground: and then, having recognized himself, he must recover.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/148|5|lbl=134.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When the sword is impeded, one must yield to that force; and attack by that movement which the same force causes to be made, and this way of operating in arms is most perfect.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/148|6|lbl=134.6}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If the enemy counterattacks, we must also counterattack, and hence the latter has the advantage.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/148|7|lbl=134.7}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Since it is possible to attack with four fingers of the sword, we do not want or need to overdo it: because the first attack must be made while fleeing, especially when the enemy has a dagger.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/149|1|lbl=135.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In all attacks, the length of the body should be taken first, and then the movement of the feet should be added; and care should be taken to ensure that the point is fast enough in reach to attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/149|2|lbl=135.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Each time the dagger parries our attacks, we will repeat the blows, which will help us to strike the dagger; that is, we will not violate our arm from its natural position.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/149|3|lbl=135.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>Whenever we agree with our posture, if the enemy withdraws (which is mostly the case), we will lower our weapons and begin the fight again in the same way: and if we seem to be on our guard, we will reduce the enemy as much as we can, putting him in need.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/149|4|lbl=135.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master begin | ||
+ | | title = Advertisements of the Single Sword | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Advertisements of the single sword'''</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''W'''henever the sword is engaged, it can be freed by withdrawing the left foot to the rear, and if the other side attacks it, it will be attacked at the same time.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/150|1|lbl=136.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>If, by pulling on an attack, we come to half a sword, we will free ours; if we hold it inward, we will pull it upward, piercing the attack: and with our left hand we will catch the opposite sword in its hilt. But if we have it on the other side, we will take it out from underneath, drawing it into the angle formed by the two swords with our left arm crossed in defense; and we will attack with the point of the sword’s fist<ref>‘A reference to the ‘sword fist’ is made in [[Antonio Manciolino]]’s Opera Nova where it states “Of the narrow iron gate guard. The sixth guard is called “porta di ferro stretta”. In which the body must be arranged diagonally in such fashion that the right shoulder (as is said above) faces the enemy, but both the arms must be stretched out to encounter the enemy, so that the sword arm is extended straight down in the defense of the right knee, and so that the sword fist be near and centered on the aforesaid knee.” (Wiktenauer, 2022) It is then clear that ‘sword’s fist’ means the hand holding the hilt of the sword.</ref> upwards.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/150|2|lbl=136.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master begin | ||
+ | | title = Treatise on the Sword and Cloak | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Treatise on the sword and cloak'''<ref>''Cappa'' means both cloak and cape (there is no differentiation in Italian). I will use cloak for the purpose of consistency. The Spanish cloak or cape is short compared with what we normally consider to be a cloak. It is usually worn anywhere from below the shoulder blade length to the hip.</ref></p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''W'''hen we use the cloak for defense, we must always remember that it differs from the dagger in that it can be cut and pierced, which is not the case with the dagger, and therefore we will never parry with the cloak in the same way as with the dagger. And just as the dagger cannot be used to parry stabbings, so the cloak cannot be used to parry them. And since we try to keep the dagger free from injury, the cloak cannot be kept in the hands of the enemy.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/151|1|lbl=137.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>All the same reasons, and all the ways, which we have said above of the single sword, and of the sword accompanied by the dagger, serve us with the sword and cloak: and of this there is no other use, than to impede the enemy; so that he | ||
+ | may not have so easy an attack; and to cover the parts below.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/151|2|lbl=137.2|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/152|1|lbl=138.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And yes, as we close the return of the enemy sword with the hand at this time when we are attacked by the points, so with the cloak we can better achieve our goal.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/152|2|lbl=138.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And because when the man is without a cloak he can be harmed and defended against in two ways: one is to throw it [the cloak] into his face and the other is to throw it over his sword at its ''debole''; this [latter] is an easier way than the first. Therefore it [the cloak] will be taken with the flat hand and with the thumb only; and with a semicircular outward movement it will be collected in the fist, and united a man can take advantage of it at his pleasure and also deprive himself of it in order to come to grips with it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/152|3|lbl=138.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Hence it may be understood that the same order must be followed in drawing the sword, and in turning the cloak into the fist, as is done with the sword and dagger, and that this must be done without giving the enemy any idea of his [the man’s] own will. This is to be done by proceeding with the sword down and the cloak out from the body, with caution, and distinguishing what the enemy will do, who, either stationary or in motion, will have to take advantage of it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/152|4|lbl=138.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If the contrary is found to be the case, it will necessarily be in one of the acts, which we have already mentioned, but against those we will use one of those offenses, which we have declared above.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/152|5|lbl=138.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/153|1|lbl=139.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And if the same opponent holds his sword in front of him, we shall fight against him in the manner already indicated, but holding his cloak in front of him, we shall always use our natural motion with our straight hand; with cuts and points we shall nevertheless attack that fist facing away from the cloak and away from the enemy’s sword.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/153|2|lbl=139.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If, however, we find our opponent in motion, we shall act against him in accordance with the proportions of the attacks he inflicts: and, being either by cutting or by thrusting, we shall do the same offences and defences as if we had no cloak, except when we wish to parry, which we shall always do, not with the sword alone, but with the sword accompanied by the cloak, and in the second half we shall attack the right opposite sides.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/153|3|lbl=139.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If, then, we wish to wait for the enemy, we shall ascertain which foot he will use to move forward, and we shall try to do so with the other foot, different from the one used for the purpose. For if he moves forward with his right foot, we shall move forward with our left foot, and if he moves forward with his left foot, we shall do the same with our right foot.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/153|4|lbl=139.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Acknowledging, that when the contrary is found with the right ahead, and that we with the left oppose it will then be with the intention of allowing all attacks to pass through; and to attack in the downward direction, with the accompaniment of the cloak.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/153|5|lbl=139.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/154|1|lbl=140.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And if we stand with the left hand in front of us, and we stand with the right, then we will immediately parry with the hand, attacking the legs or the right arm or the ''punta riversa''.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/154|2|lbl=140.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In this case we will be able to parry the cuts with our cloak alone, because we will parry the enemy’s rise [of his sword] with our own [parry] in the first third of the sword, before it is declines in strength.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/154|3|lbl=140.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>We must remedy the enemy’s attack with our sword, so that we can be sure of the attack outside of this ''tempo'': and if we were to attack the enemy by chance at that time, it would be drawn in part, where the enemy’s cloak would entangle and impede our sword so that we would not recover it in time. Therefore, by securing ourselves against the enemy’s attack, we shall attack him secondarily in his right parts.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/154|4|lbl=140.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 25.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>In order to wait for the opposite, we shall place ourselves in this guard, which is shown below; that is to say, with the left foot forward in a half step, with the weight on the right leg, and with the sword across - then the point of is above our head with the fist at the level of the left shoulder and with the flat of the left hand wrapped in the cloak, and in the first strong point of the sword.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/154|5|lbl=140.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/155|1|lbl=141.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>In this posture, the enemy’s sword is always held inwards; and when he pulls, whatever he wishes, to make a strong attack (be it by a cut or a point), he is stronger with his left foot alone: and when he extends that line, he attacks himself, helping the sword with the strength of his left hand. As this figure demonstrates.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/155|2|lbl=141.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''I'''f, however, we allow the enemy to pass with a right hand, the respondent, taking advantage of this point of view will be able to make a mortal wound, leaving behind his cloak, which will close the way for the enemy’s sword.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/157|1|lbl=142.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If, while we are in this posture, the enemy does not resolve to attack us, but, putting himself on guard, waits until we are the first to attack; and if he stands with his foot straight forward, and with his sword in front of him, we with the ''stringeremo''<ref>''Stringeremo'' appears to mean the same as ''stringere'' or a drawing close posture. Most commonly used as ''stringere la spada'' where using the stronger part of the sword you engage with the weaker part of the opponent’s sword and take the line or advantage so the point of the opponent’s sword can no longer strike you.</ref> posture will hold him, wounding him with the same attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/157|2|lbl=142.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>If, however, he should try with his left foot to strike our sword with his cloak, we shall return with our left foot to the centre, and go out to the first of the four guards we have proposed; and with that fist we shall attack with the point or the cut, or above, passing the point and entering the face.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/157|3|lbl=142.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master begin | ||
+ | | title = Treatise on the Buckler | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Treatise on the Buckler'''</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''M'''any people have used the buckler in the same way as a dagger, and they have used it as a parry, accompanying it with the sword. However, since it is difficult for a man to show what he is capable of by means of some instrument, if he does not first make known what it belongs to, it is necessary, in order not to be mistaken, for them to know the quality and properties of the very instrument with which he intends to represent that essence. Since, therefore, we have to deal with the defensive instrument (as I said), we will begin by discussing it in this way.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/158|1|lbl=144.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="3" | [[File:Ghisliero p145.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>The buckler is a spherical, dense and opaque body, and in order for it to do its work properly, its surface must be less than a foot in diameter, since most men are a foot and a half wide: And because the effect of the buckler is to resist the sword, so that it cannot injure our body; since with this sword man can form different and infinite lines, which by similarity we can resemble the rays of the sun (a spherical and luminous body). Therefore we must know that there are two opaque bodies, that is to say, transparent: as are air, water and fire.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/158|2|lbl=144.2|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/159|1|lbl=145.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore perspective, as we read in the fourth proposition of the first part of the common perspective, wants a spherical, dense, opaque and consequently shadowy body to be considered in three ways with respect to another spherical, luminous and resplendent body.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/159|2|lbl=145.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>In the first way it will be considered, when the shadowy body is greater than the luminous body,; for then they will desire and demand that the said shadowy body will cause and cast a shadow, which, the farther it extends, the more it will grow larger and larger, as is shown in the following figure, in which the luminous body is understood as A, the shadowy as B, and the shadowed as C.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/159|3|lbl=145.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="3" | [[File:Ghisliero p146.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>In the second, it must be considered that the spherical shadowed body is of the same size as the luminous one, and that the shadowed body will always send out a shadow of equal width to its diameter, and that the shadow may extend as far as one wishes, as we can clearly see in the following figure.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/160|1|lbl=146.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>Lastly, in the third way, we may consider that the spherical shadowy body is smaller than the luminous one, and that the shadowy one is thus to cause and send a shadow, which, the longer it extends, the more it shrinks until it finally ends in sharpness and ends in a point from which a pyramidal figure emerges, the extreme point of which is called the Cone. This experience shows us the following figure.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/160|2|lbl=146.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>Of all these ways, the first is the one which we will use with the buckler: because it is a spherical, opaque body, greater than the spherical, luminous body, or greater than the fist of the hand; from which, like the rays of the sun, arise the proportions of the lines which man forms with the sword, we will oppose it in such a way that it will cast a shadow, by which we will be covered and defended.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/160|3|lbl=146.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/161|1|lbl=147.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''H'''owever, we shall note that on this occasion the sword will have the opposite effect, specifically in a straight line or in power; i.e. in an oblique line. When it is in a straight line, we shall regard it as a single ray of the Sun, and we shall oppose it with the at the same point; but when it is oblique to our body, we shall oppose it using the buckler at the body of the fist at the origin of the ray, or of the line, so that we will be covered by the shadow of the opaque body of the buckler.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/161|2|lbl=147.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And just as many straight lines, which come from a centre, the further they move away from that centre, the more they dilate among themselves: so, that if we use the buckler to oppose the sword, either the sword will get stuck in it, or it will cut it, so that it will move further away from its centre and from our body.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/161|3|lbl=147.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It will therefore be held in the hand with the thumb resting on it: so that this part does not fall inwards: otherwise our body would be exposed and offended: and so that it will always operate as a blurred body, we will hold it with the arm outstretched: so that the greater shadow will be caused by its distance from our body.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/161|4|lbl=147.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/162|1|lbl=148.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>So that with this, as with all other kinds of defensive weapons, we shall operate by committing ourselves, without giving the enemy any intention of our will: distinguishing that the enemy will either be in motion or in a stationary state of mind.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/162|2|lbl=148.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If the enemy is in motion, he will either use a slash or a thrust: we shall make the same parries and attacks to these slashes as we have said; but when we parry them with the buckler, we shall proceed with the accompanied arms; and we shall follow the centre of the fist and counterattack with the left foot.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/162|3|lbl=148.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>I leave it to say that we may injure before, during and after ''tempo'' in the same manner as we have said in the treatise on the sword and dagger, but we must always put the buckler behind the fist of our sword, stretching out the arm and body, and covering ourselves with it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/162|4|lbl=148.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If the opponent thrusts with the point, he can make the same attacks and parries that have already been said; but since things can easily be moved while they are in motion, the same defence can be made with the buckler as if it were a dagger.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/162|5|lbl=148.5|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/163|1|lbl=149.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When the enemy is stationary, he may have his sword in front of him or behind him; if he has it in front of him or parallel with the ground in a straight line or at an angle.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/163|2|lbl=149.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>We shall oppose the buckler at the extreme point of each line, which will be high, and we shall pierce it underneath with our greatest length and in the same stroke.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/163|3|lbl=149.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>We shall oppose all straight lines which are at the right of the centre of our body (as in the case of the third and fourth guards) with the buckler at the extremity of the line; and above we shall put our sword to attack in a straight line.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/163|4|lbl=149.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If, on the other hand, he holds his sword at an angle to our body, he will place the scabbard against his fist; and with the same stroke he will attack the nearest place above.<p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/163|5|lbl=149.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If the opposite party holds the sword at an angle, the same offence will be carried out as if we had the dagger, helping the enemy’s sword to its inclination.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/163|6|lbl=149.6}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If we make the opposite move with the sword to the rear, we will seek out the enemy’s body in the aforesaid manner, and we will hold the buckler above our body in order to strike it, as if it were a dagger, thus necessitating the opposite sword to pass through it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/163|7|lbl=149.7}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="4" class="noline" | [[File:Ghisliero p150.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>When we have stopped our opponent with our left foot in front and the buckler has been placed in front of us, we will, in our natural right hand, once we have arrived at a distance, and with our body in a dark position, seek out the enemy, moving away from his sword, and with our circles we will move the sword around the buckler, and then, arriving at the plane of our shoulder, we will throw our points upwards; and if he raises his buckler, we will do so below.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/164|1|lbl=150.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>We may also place the point of our sword in the centre of the enemy’s scabbard, who may be certain to lower it in order to see the sword, and at the same time to wound himself by walking with the point in his face.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/164|2|lbl=150.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>For the sake of greater intelligence I have placed this figure here so that one may see the effect of the lines when they cut into the buckler.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/164|3|lbl=150.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p><br/><br/><br/></p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master begin | ||
+ | | title = Treatise Against a Left-Handed Person | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Treatise Against a Left-Handed Person'''<ref>Ghisliero assumes all fencers are right hand dominant in this treatise and writes as such.</ref></p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''A'''ll the arguments of the single sword; of the sword and dagger; of the cloak; and of the buckler, serve the left-handed against the right-handed; as well as the right-handed against the left-handed. And the weapon of defence can serve no other purpose than to parry the blows, which are thrown from afar; & to close the line: because, when the right-handed man is fighting the left-handed man, both have their swords on one side and their bodies placed in such a way that all the points of their swords strike at an angle, so that they cannot be parried with a defensive weapon, and therefore they must be parried with the sword, since the weakness of the left-handed man’s sword will pass through the strength of the right-handed man’s sword.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/165|1|lbl=151.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Therefore, the right-handed sword should be held in such a way that it dominates the left-handed sword inwards; and with the body in profile and the good edge, it should drive the points to the nearest place to be attacked.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/165|2|lbl=151.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The right hand will never injure the left-hander from the inside; but if he is not in motion, he can be injured at that time.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/165|3|lbl=152.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The right-handed [person] must distinguish whether the left-handed person will hold his sword forward or backward; and will act against the left-handed person in the aforesaid manner; that is to say, dominating the sword when it moves forward, giving the left-handed person the power to attack in tempo; and when it moves backward, he will fight with his body ready to make the same attack, closing the way to the enemy’s sword with his defensive weapons.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/166|1|lbl=152.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>The right hand will allow all cuts to pass through, and will wound after the time of the slash; or it will help him to decline, and will attack backwards: it will also be able to parry covered, and will make all the same attacks, that we have said, that are made before the tempo.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/166|2|lbl=152.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master begin | ||
+ | | title = Combat at the Barriers | ||
+ | | width = 100% | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 1 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Combat at the Barriers'''</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''I'''n all Cavalier’s armies, the Cavalier must demonstrate the agility, dexterity and strength of his body which are played at as a game. And it should be noted that there are two reasons why this type of spectacle is usually done: the first is to show the assistants the similarity of an event of arms; the second is so that each of the combatants can show the valour of his person. Therefore, of all the games of arms, that of the barriers is the noblest, which is nothing more than the representation of two battles, in which the first battle is fought with the pike, and then the sword is drawn, and the victory, which is its end, is sought.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/167|1|lbl=153.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When the crowd has been assembled, they fight hand-to-hand; and this is done in order that each individual may not only show his strength, but may also make the spectator aware of the general battle.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/167|2|lbl=153.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The Cavalier, therefore, imitates the truth in all his actions, as if he were in the very act of fighting with softened irons, but at the same time he avoids all extremes; he does not do things completely from where he stands, nor does he do them completely by play; and he takes care to do all his natural movements, both of the whole body and of its parts, and this always without any affectation.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/167|3|lbl=153.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/168|1|lbl=154.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 2 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>''In this combat there are two types of weapons, the pike and the rapier, or the sword, which we shall now deal with in particular.''<br/><br/></p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''T'''he pike has three proportions, namely, the ''piombo'',<ref>''Piombo'' means the part made of lead or can mean to plummet down.</ref> which is the perpendicular, the median, and the horizon. The ''piombo'' is when it departs from the perpendicular and moves downwards; the horizon is when it moves in a straight line from the eye to any apparent point in the plane of the horizon.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/168|2|lbl=154.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Six things are done with the pike:</p> | ||
+ | # The first is that it is used to walk the field a little. | ||
+ | # The second is, that with it one presents oneself to battle. | ||
+ | # The third is, that with it one walks to the attack. | ||
+ | # The fourth is, that with it one wounds oneself. | ||
+ | # The fifth is, that it is thrown to the ground, in order to be able to put one’s hand to the hook. | ||
+ | # The sixth and last step is to walk with the pike in armour. | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/168|3|lbl=154.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/169|1|lbl=155.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The walk which a man makes with a pike when he enters the field must be such that the combatant shows ease in his legs, by holding them in place, and strength in his waist, disdaining the weight of his weapons. It is important to take care not to take large or small steps, but to take them naturally and without any affectation. Hold the pike on the straight shoulder, with the ''calce''<ref>''Cálce'' means, a ventplate of a tilting staffe or place to hold it by. (Florio 1611)</ref> under the horizon, and in such a way that, when a line is drawn from the knee, an acute angle is formed with it: and keep the arm straight, not in the plane of the shoulder, but a little slanting, in order to avoid slicing.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/169|2|lbl=155.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And every time that the Cavalier raises his arm from the shoulder to strengthen it, he should do so in the proper manner, not making any movement which is not done in time and in concert. This will be most successful if, in raising the pike, he lifts his foot straight up; and in lowering it, he draws back his right foot, with his sight towards the point; and in the same way, in raising the pike, in order to put it back on the shoulder, he lifts his foot, always making the same stroke.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/169|3|lbl=155.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | [[File:Ghisliero 29.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | {| style="width: 399px; margin-right: auto; margin-left: auto;" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | style="text-align: left; width: 100px;" | ''Postura.'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: center; width: 200px;" | ''Passeggio à man diritta.'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: right; width: 100px;" | ''Volta.'' | ||
+ | |} | ||
+ | | <p>The body is to be presented to the battle with the body straight and upright, and because it is customary to wait for the Maintainer to be in order. At this time, therefore, one must make some movement, sometimes with the head, sometimes with the foot, sometimes with the hand, and sometimes with the whole ''calce'', in order to show courage and so that one does not look like a statue with the pike. Besides this, the body is to be held plumb in line under the right foot, and with the straight arm stretched upwards. As this figure shows, in which there is the proportion of the body, which, departing from tranquillity, is done in passing to our left hand, and the other which is done in turning to walk with the right hand, which shows the perspective of the body.<p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/169|4|lbl=155.4|p=1}} {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|170|lbl=156|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | [[File:Ghisliero 30.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | {| style="width: 399px; margin-right: auto; margin-left: auto;" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | style="text-align: left; width: 200px;" | ''Passeggio à man manca'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: left; width: 100px;" | ''volta.'' | ||
+ | | style="text-align: right; width: 100px;" | ''Ferrita.'' | ||
+ | |} | ||
+ | | <p>'''I'''n departing from the state to enter the ''passeggio'',<ref>''Passeggio'' means a walk or turn in a walking.</ref> which is the third operation, which is done with the pike, this is done transversally, trying to gain ground and approach the enemy. And since our body has three portions, namely, perspective, ''scurzo'', and profile, it will be done in such a way that the pike and the body always form the same view: and because one cannot enter into perspective in profile without passing through the middle, which is the ''scurzo''. However, in order to avoid the error of the extremes, one should always enter the other in the order we have shown in the preceding figures. Nevertheless, one should always try to keep the body as much as possible in ''scurzo'', in order to form a more better view. The pike should be kept in the middle line, as shown in the two figures, which have the views that our body makes; that is, the ''scurzo'' and the perspective.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/172|1|lbl=158.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The fourth operation to be performed with the pike is the attack, which, in accordance with the rules established among combatants, must be made in a particular place of the body, if it is to be made from the gorget upwards: and the pike, in order to maintain its strength, must be made in a straight line and in its third horizontal position: as can be seen in the following demonstration, in which we show first of all the profile that the body makes with the pike when it walks with a right hand, and then the second way, when the body turns to enter ''scurzo'', which the man does, either to lower the pike to attack, or even to walk, and the third figure is the attack that is being discussed here.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/172|2|lbl=158.2|p=1}} {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|173|lbl=159|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''A'''nd since the real operation of the pike is done with the weight of the body, the Cavalier must make this attack with a force, and no more. This force will be three steps forward, which is important in terms of the length of the man, who, once he has exceeded this amount, will begin another force.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/175|1|lbl=161.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>I would elect the best way to break the pike, since it can be broken in four ways. In the first, you can put the ''calce'' of the pike in the left side, in order to advance its length: you can also break it by driving the pike straight into the left side: but apart from the fact that this makes it difficult to see, it is difficult to avoid the point, because the pike is out of sight. Nor would a pike, if it were made to stand up, be kept in such a state: nor is the body in a position to use its strength properly.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/175|2|lbl=161.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>But when one is a Maintainer, one will be able to vary one’s attacks in these other ways better and with more reason.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/175|3|lbl=161.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the second, by moving the arms away from the body, one can injure by breaking the pike in the body, since it is difficult to insert it in any other part of the body; but all blows are oblique and very disconcerting, and this is the true operation of the pike.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/175|4|lbl=161.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the third (and this is more perfect) one can, with three steps of strength, pass from the right foot, and attack with one hand.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/176|1|lbl=162.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the fourth and last step (which is the one on which we are going to attack, once we have put the body in perspective), little by little the pike will be lowered and received by the other hand. When we have arrived in distance, with it in the horizon, we must make sure that the end of the pike is pointing straight at the point where we want to attack. Withdrawing the left foot from the right one, and adjusting the attack, the three steps are moved, first moving the left foot and then the right, and finally the descending of the weight and the force of the man are brought to bear on the left hand. In order to make the attack in a straight line, the right arm is held at an angle and the fist is held close to the belt.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/176|2|lbl=162.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The fifth operation, which is done with the pike, is the retreat, after the attack has been made: and this is done in order to do battle again with another pike, or to use the hook; which pike, broken by the Cavalier, he will throw to the ground. And there are three ways of throwing it to the ground: First, behind, or by the side, or over the straight shoulder; but this, apart from the fact that the pike cannot be thrown, is mostly thrown on the head, and to the godfathers, and to those around.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/176|3|lbl=162.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the second, one may throw the pike out of contempt for the enemy: but since it is in the power of the enemy to send back his ''scalzo'',<ref>''Scalzo'' means bare-footed or unshod. (Florio 1611)</ref> it is not, in my opinion, a matter of vilifying the enemy; since he will have to strike with his spear without fail, in which (being the greater value) others may remember the contempt and give bread for cake:<ref>Render pane per focaccia is a proverb which means ‘give bread for cake’ or to render like for like. p105 (Macadam, 1924)</ref> because where one waits for deeds little care is taken for the contempt.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/177|1|lbl=163.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the third, which we shall use well, is used immediately after we have made the attack. We shall lift the ''calce'' of the pike with our left foot, retreating, and with our right foot, retreating again, this same ''calce'' will make the left hand slip, and we shall throw it to the ground through our right side: which, as well as being a beautiful thing to see, is more likely to be true, because if we drop it on the ground, we come to the crowd, and immediately draw our sword.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/177|2|lbl=163.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>The sixth operation is that when the Cavalier has departed from the field, and the battle is over, and he finds himself stationary with his pike in the pendicular, he will start up with his left foot; and then, with his right foot following it, he will place the ''calce'' of his pike in the same position: and after he has taken about five or six steps, stretched out in the proper manner, he will lower his pike and put it on his shoulder, and follow his course.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/177|3|lbl=163.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 3 - Treatise on the ''Stocco'' | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Treatise on the ''Stocco'''''<ref>''Stocco'', means a short or arming-sword, a tuck. Also a short bat or truncheon. (Florio 1611)</ref></p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''T'''he Cavalier in beating with the ''stocco'' has three parts, that is to say, fluency, strength and prestige: the fluency consists in freeing the blows well - which is of great advantage - because the ''stocco'' is not left tangled with the opposite ''stocco'', the strength is a gift of nature. Nevertheless, since the hit of the ''stocco'' is made with movement, it is necessary to take the precaution of choosing the best one and with this method one may strike with greater force. And nimbleness, being the most precious gift of nature in the use of arms, will ensure that the Cavalier is well resolved in all the ways in which he wishes to strike; and this he will also do with a very short tempo.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/178|1|lbl=164.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Since we have already dealt in full with the nature of motion and the nature of the cuts, and which of them are the greatest, in accordance with their descent, we need not go into greater detail here. We will only say that natural | ||
+ | motion, aided by the power of movement, will have the greatest effect on a resisting party, and that the real blow will be when the hook with the arm forms a straight line with the shoulder.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/178|2|lbl=164.2|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/179|1|lbl=165.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And it can be beaten in several ways: in the one with round blows; in the other with cross blows, and with doubled rights; or it can be beaten with the arm open, and the weight is carried with the shoulder, moving from the centre of the body upwards.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/179|2|lbl=165.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When we strike with rounded blades then the ''stocco'' is not well freed and the blow is not the greatest that can be made.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/179|3|lbl=165.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When we strike with traversal cuts, aided by the greater movement and weight of the body, this is the best way to do it, because by this means we strike in the middle of the temple and the jaw, which is the easiest place to stun the opponent, and to help him decline.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/179|4|lbl=165.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The beating with the fifth doubling ''cétro''<ref>''Cétro'' means ‘a Scepter, a mace of dignity.’ (Florio 1611)</ref> is done for the same reason, so that, since these blows are of short duration, the enemy is more quickly stunned: but these are of little weight; so there is the danger of incurring some disorder.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/179|5|lbl=165.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When the arm is held open with the motion of the body and is struck on the chin, this act is womanish, and takes a long time, so that the ''stocco'' may fall, and it is brutish to behold.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/179|6|lbl=165.6}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It remains, therefore, that our Cavalier should be the first to attack the enemy: for it is always a good thing and an advantage to be the first to attack: and this with a transversal ''mandritto'' centred on the left foot, so that the circumference is greater. Moreover, he will be deceived by the opposite of distance; and he will be attacked while in motion.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/179|7|lbl=165.7|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/180|1|lbl=166.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If the Cavalier should find that one of the combatants is disconcerted by his blows, he may present himself as stationary to strike with the forehand; or he may be the first to strike with a right slash, but doing so with weakness; and then, if the opponent strikes with a right slash, he will have to help him to the ground, where his weight will be hanging.<ref>I think he is describing a downward bind here and I also think ‘blow’ should be noted here as ‘beat’.</ref></p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/180|2|lbl=166.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It should be noted that if the opponent is disconcerted by the blow, the same blow will be made, just as if he is disconcerted by the right blow, we will double the right blow.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/180|3|lbl=166.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>If the hoofs should become entangled in the hands, we must take care not to pull towards ourselves, but towards the ground, at which time we must place our left knee under the barrier, and use both hands to help ourselves.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/180|4|lbl=166.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And if, as is usually the case, the opposite should happen, and the body should come over the barrier, the left hand should be brought down towards the barrier, and the hand above the helmet should be brought to the centre.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/180|5|lbl=166.5}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>There are two ways in which the ''stocco'' can be made to fall backwards: first, when it is attacked with a cut, by striking it in the arm with a cut; secondly, when it wishes to form a reversal, if we place our ''stocco'' with the point over his straight shoulder, and form a line with it.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/180|6|lbl=166.6|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/181|1|lbl=167.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''B'''ut to come to a more practical point, the Cavalier must know the rules and regulations laid down by the Masters, so that he may act in accordance with them: and so, with the order of the pages, godfathers and drummers, he will enter the field.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/181|2|lbl=167.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>But as he boldly walks through the field, when he has arrived in the presence of the ladies, he bows his pike and pays reverence to them in the manner already indicated. Then he will do the same before the Judges, if only with less humility.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/181|3|lbl=167.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When he has arrived at the place set aside for the game, the Cavalier, raising his pike in the proper manner, will present himself in state for the battle, and will show himself to be brave in arms. When he raises his straight foot, he will raise the pike with his right hand; and with his left hand he will press it away from his right hand at an honourable distance; and withdrawing his right hand he will pay homage to the ladies. Lastly by finishing the beat with the same foot, the pike will finish its transversal declination.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/181|4|lbl=167.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/182|1|lbl=168.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Then the Cavalier, having his foot right, will return the pike, passing with his foot, and with the pike in perspective, and with the beat of the forehand; with the body in ''scurzo'', and the pike in the said proportion, then he will take only the pike with the right hand; and raising the right foot, he will raise the pike high. At this point, making an act of reverence with the hand, the pike is lowered; and with the hand, entering the passage, and with the body in ''scurzo'', the pike is raised high; and held in the middle position, always making the same strokes with the foot and hand.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/182|2|lbl=168.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Then, when he has arrived at the end of the walk, he will beat the Cavalier one beat, looking at the opposite of what he is doing: and seeing that he still does not enter the battle, he will return to the same walk with a movement of life indicating that his will to fight was ready. But seeing the maintainer come to battle, he will go and attack him in the manner already mentioned: and having made the attack he will withdraw, taking up the other pike. He will do this from hand to hand: and when he has broken the last pike, he will immediately take up his ''stocco''.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/182|3|lbl=168.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And in order that all this may proceed in concert, it should be known that instead of the retreat, which is made in raising the hand foot, and then in withdrawing it, the pike is raised; and then in withdrawing the forearm, the same is thrown underneath the right flank. Then in this act of raising the hand, the pike is raised, and when the foot is struck, the pike is thrown underneath the right-hand flank: and underneath the sword, aided by the left hand, and then with the right hand back, the hand is thrown at the same time to the ''stocco''; and following the retreat, the action is carried out as follows.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/182|4|lbl=168.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/183|1|lbl=169.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Reverence is to be paid with the right foot, and with the body turned towards the Ladies, holding the ''stocco'' crossed above with the left hand. Then, passing with the right forehand in that line, the ''stocco'' shall be raised high, turning to the Judges; and with the short forehand making an act of reverence. Then with all speed, passing again with the left hand, he will pick up the ''stocco'' in its extremity with the left hand above: and looking at the barrier, the Cavalier will stand two paces away in a state of attack with his left foot in front; and while he is arriving, drawing his breath with all his strength, he will attack with a transversal cut. Repeating the reversal, he will finish his blows – which, once they are completed – he will withdraw his right foot one step backwards; and with his ''stocco'' raised in the act of attacking, will make a bracing movement of the head.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/183|2|lbl=169.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It may be doubted whether the ''stocco'' should be used to make the reverence, because if the pike is broken, the battle with the ''stocco'' is proposed. So I reply that because the pike and the ''stocco'' are different weapons, and because each of them is awarded a prize, and because to pay homage gives the spectators time to prepare themselves for the rest; but this must be done if it is of little importance for the battle.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/183|3|lbl=169.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/184|1|lbl=170.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>The Cavalier will then always retreat with his body in perspective, and with the steps mentioned above, but he will brandish his ''stocco''; which, once he has reached his godfather, he will immediately re-sheathe, to give way to the other combatants.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/184|2|lbl=170.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 4 - Treatise on the Crowd | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Treatise on the Crowd'''</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''I'''t is broken, according to the agreement of one or three pikes in the manner described above: once this has been done, it comes to the scuffle with the ''stocco''; and if one wishes to pass against it, it is necessary for the first to put on his right hand, so that he can push his companions with his left hand. And he must always attack with his right hand, since if he is attacked sideways, he cannot succeed because his companions are hindered: and all the blows, whether of his enemies or of his friends, will be received by his arm. And this is all I need to say about the combat which takes place in the barrier.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/184|3|lbl=170.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/185|1|lbl=171.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It remains for me, however, to admonish the Fathers, that when they give the pike into the hand of their combatant, they must first take their right hand with their left hand: and thus hand them the same pike, having placed it in his hand, at the appropriate ''calce'': so that the combatant may not have cause to put both hands together in order to place it well in his right hand: which is an ugly thing to see.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/185|2|lbl=171.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The Drummers, when they arrive at the field, must beat the call: when the walk begins, they must beat the call: when the pike is lowered to attack, the battle; when the pike is broken, the retreat; and so they do from hand to hand, according to need. This same order must be followed when fighting with the ''stocco''.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/185|3|lbl=171.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>I have not wished to treat here of certain vain ''leuate'',<ref>The name of a march upon a drum and trumpet in a time of war.</ref> which can sometimes be made by galloping: for the invention of this belongs to the Maintainers: for, when they proceed with the reasons and rules which I have stated above, they will be able to make them themselves, and compose them in their own way for the Cavaliers: who will at least endeavour to keep as far as possible on the side of the truth.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/185|4|lbl=171.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/186|1|lbl=172.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | {{master end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master begin | ||
+ | | title = Treatise of a Fighter on Foot Against a Fighter on Horseback | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Treatise of a Fighter on Foot Against a Fighter on Horseback'''</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''I'''f a man on foot wishes to fight against a man fighting on horseback, he must act in accordance with the nature of the horse, which, being formed of a single body on four legs, has the natural movement of walking along the right side, and walking with any other kind of movement, that movement will be the centre of the legs in front of it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/186|2|lbl=172.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It is therefore natural for all animals to flee from things which are harmful to their good being (since they are moved by the concupiscent power which nature grants them for this purpose), whence it follows that the horse, when struck in some part of its body, yields on the same side in order to escape from the offence: And if there be any offence in the flanks by the spurs, when, nevertheless, he is struck in another part of the body, which is nobler than the flanks, with greater offence than the spurs, he will yield on that side, in which he will receive greater offence.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/186|3|lbl=172.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/187|1|lbl=173.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | rowspan="2" | [[File:Ghisliero 31.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>The enemy, therefore, when he is on horseback, will try to strike the opposite side, putting the horse to flight; or he will try to take away the right hand of the horse in order to attack it with his sword. But he who fights on foot will seek to flee from that side with his own right hand, in order to get away from the enemy’s attack, and to approach the opposite side, as this figure shows.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/187|2|lbl=173.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | <p>'''I'''n the same way, since the horse will never be able to strike us with its natural motion except by its right, we will always have to ride to the horse’s right: thus we will prevent the enemy from seeing us, who will be on horseback: and standing in mid-step, and united in strength, and placed with the sword outstretched, out of our body, and with the cloak drawn in the fist, so that, if we can deprive ourselves of it, we shall, as soon as the horse is at a distance, make a cut in the horse’s muzzle, or a thrust in the same place, passing from the right foot, followed by the left foot, to our right sides, and attacking the reins with a transverse blow. Then, placing ourselves in the middle of the circumference, which forms the horse in the state in which a circle is drawn around its body, we will stand here without more condemning the enemy, but continuously attacking either the horse or the man.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/189|1|lbl=175.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It will also be possible to frighten the horse when it is at a distance with the cloak, or to pull it over the head, making the same passes and attacks.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/189|2|lbl=175.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It will also be necessary to use the left hand on the bridle, or with the same hand to leverage his foot, and thus to dismount him.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/189|3|lbl=175.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>And if the horse should pass against him, it will be necessary to make a cut in the bridle.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/189|4|lbl=175.4}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master begin | ||
+ | | title = Treatise of One on Horseback Against Another on Horseback | ||
+ | | width = 100% | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 1 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''Treatise of One on Horseback''' ''who fights with his sword against another also on horseback.''</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''T'''he same reason that we use to gain a straight line when we are on foot will be the same when we are on horseback, and this will be easier: because the movement of the horse will take longer than ours did when we were on foot, and the horse is of no use to man for anything other than the comfort of the rider’s legs.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/190|1|lbl=176.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And because the horse is long-bodied, it forms a line, which, when it is carried in a transverse motion, remains stationary at one end; at the other end it forms a circle. In the same way, the horse, in violent motion, forms a circle with the rest of its body by centering its rear legs.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/190|2|lbl=176.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And just as, on foot, by gaining the diameter of the circle, we gain the straight line, and the enemy is obliged to pass through it, so, on horseback, we shall always gain the diameter of the circle: and so we shall say that which we may gain some knowledge of it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/190|3|lbl=176.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/191|1|lbl=177.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | [[File:Ghisliero 32.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>We must always ride against the enemy in a straight line, that is to say, head to head: and if the opponent should go astray, this will facilitate our aim much more: for we shall keep our horse in the centre with greater ease, forming a much smaller circle than the enemy will make with his: and we shall also endeavour to keep in a straight line. Assuming, however, that the enemy will come into [range for] collision, when he has arrived at the distance from which the horse will turn his head, we shall enter by the straight line, and hold our sword with our fist in front of our [saddle] bow, and cross it in such a way that the point of the sword faces the horse’s left ear: which in this way is in a state to parry and attack. Not by standing on horseback other attacks than these two; that is; a point from below upwards at the length of the horse’s neck; and the reversal by the same path: as this figure shows, in which that drawn line shows the posture; & and sword the attack.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/191|2|lbl=177.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And if the enemy should turn and take the charge, we must follow him in a straight line with the head of our horse to the breech of his: and if he wants to turn, we will hunt him in the rear: and when we have a good horse under us, we can tail him by putting him under our right hand, so that we can attack him in the head or in the side of the horse.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/193|1|lbl=179.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>If the Cavalier finds himself on a horse which is not sufficient for the blow, he may resolve to flee the encounter, and meet the enemy, who will then come to meet him on the parade; and putting his horse to flight, he will have to put his right arm out in a straight line, and in force: and in so doing he will always find the opposite party, who will have his arm out of force: and from this point he will easily be able to drop his sword or ''stocco''.</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/193|2|lbl=179.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | {{master subsection begin | ||
+ | | title = Chapter 2 | ||
+ | | width = 90em | ||
+ | }} | ||
+ | {| class="master" | ||
+ | |- | ||
+ | ! <p>Images</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>{{rating|C}}<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | ! <p>Transcription<br/>by [[Nicola Boyd]]</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>''The practice of running with lances was invented in order to amuse and enliven the Cavaliers, and to make them practised and trained in these operations, so that they would be experts when it came to doing their duty. Therefore, in order to facilitate this method, the ring race was invented: if it is still customary to break the spears in the Quintana; or to meet inside the lace; or to practise without it. But all these ways of exercising are done for a single purpose, which is the open field and war: and since, of all these games, that of the ring race is the most common and the most used, we will deal with it at length.''<br/><br/></p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>'''F'''irst of all there are six circumstances which contribute to the good running of the lance. The first is to hold the spear well above the thigh. The second is to lift it with an attitude from the thigh. The third is to stop it gracefully. The fourth is to lower it in time. The fifth is to attack at the right time. The sixth is to collect it in the proper manner.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/194|1|lbl=180.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>In the first. There are three ways of holding the lance above the thigh: the Cavalier first being aware that when he is armed, he must hold it between his partner<ref>''Conscia'' is Latin and means partner or accomplice, which in this case appears to mean the horse. (DictZone, 2022)</ref> and saddle bow, since the weapon does not allow it to rest on him. In the first way, therefore, the spear is held with the point towards the right side of the Albanian: and this is called an open spear. In the second, the point is held with the hand to the left, but in order to avoid the extremities we must hold it in the middle, so that it has the same view of the body. The third way, in between [the positions in the first and second] we will hold it with the arm straight ahead in such a state that it forms an angle with the elbow; and this, neither high nor low; but naturally in such a way that we can feel comfortable in our strength.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/194|2|lbl=180.2|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/195|1|lbl=181.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The second circumstance, which is the raising of the lance from the thigh, can be done in six ways.</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | # In the first, the lance is raised with the fist in the air; and, holding it with the wrist, it is stopped little by little. | ||
+ | # In the second, it is raised by extending the arm downwards along the straight side. | ||
+ | # In the third, he rises by extending his fist from his body with his arm outstretched like an Albanian.<ref>It is uncertain how an Albanian, which might also be a Stratioti in this case, would hold the lance.</ref> | ||
+ | # In the fourth it rises up, and immediately stops at the Stradiota.<ref>Stradiotto means ‘the kind of soldiers that Venitians use, like our Carbines, Freebooters or bootie-halers.’ Stratioti ‘An estradiot was a fighter of the mercenary light cavalry units who fought on European battlefields during the first half of the sixteenth century.’ (https://educalingo.com/en/dic-fr/stradiot accessed 17/10/2021)</ref> | ||
+ | # In the fifth it rises with his arm extended from his straight side, but a little bent. With the hand turned inwards. | ||
+ | # In the sixth (and this is the manner in which we shall act: for it is the best) it is raised from the thigh, leaving the fist in that plane, & with the wrist, holding it, the point of it is placed on the right side of the ring; and the arm is bent a little: thus it is more easily supported; and is more likely to stop with greater ease: and this is according to the custom of war. | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/195|2|lbl=181.2|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/196|1|lbl=182.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The third circumstance, which is the stopping of the spear, is done in four ways.</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | # In the first it is stopped at the beginning of the career. | ||
+ | # In the second, when the horse is sent. | ||
+ | # In the third, when the Cavalier approaches his opponent at a distance of one lance. These three ways, as well as being ugly to see, and if it is possible to do the latter, nevertheless, when one is running with the lance in the saddle, because of the movement of the horse, the lance is easily dislodged, and if it has to be held still, the result is a very ugly effect. The way of halting can be done with the hand turned upwards, when running unarmed, and turned upwards, when running unarmed, and turned downwards: and this way is considered the best, since it is natural motion, just as any other is violent. | ||
+ | # In the fourth, it stops at the same time that the lance arrives in a straight line in the attack. | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/196|2|lbl=182.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The fourth circumstance, which is to lower the lance, is done in four ways.</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | # In the first, it is lowered immediately after it is stopped. | ||
+ | # In the second, when the man approaches the enemy, he lowers it a little. | ||
+ | # In the third, he lowers himself, and wounds himself at the same time; the first should not be done in any way; the second is more manageable; the third is a beautiful act, when it can be done; but it is difficult. | ||
+ | # The fourth, which is the best of all, is done by lowering the lance a little at a time, until the lance is hard enough to finish its descent into the attack. | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/196|3|lbl=182.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/197|1|lbl=183.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The fifth circumstance, which is the attack, if we wish to ascertain the point, immediately upon leaving, we shall place the lance in such a way that its extremity is on the right side of the point, which is to be attacked: and that our view, passing beyond the lance, discovers the point, or the Ring.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/197|2|lbl=183.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The sixth circumstance, which is the recovery of the lance, is done in two ways.</p> | ||
+ | |||
+ | # In the first, the ''calce'' of the lance is raised up and placed over the thigh. | ||
+ | # In the second, the lance is thrown behind the right thigh, making the point of the lance look backwards, and then, when the horse is stopped, it is put back on the thigh. | ||
+ | |||
+ | <p>And I would distinguish between these two modalities: that when running to the ring, once the attack has been made, the fist should be raised high; and once the horse has been parried, the lance should be put back into the thigh: because the whole lance should be held in the act of attacking: but if the lances are broken, I would praise them for having the trunk of the lance placed behind the right thigh.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/197|3|lbl=183.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | [[file:Ghisliero 33.jpg|400px|center]] | ||
+ | | <p>When a straight line has been drawn from the ring to the line of the carriage, two parallel lines should be formed, and the line of the lance in the ring will form an acute angle with the given line, as is shown in this demonstration below: therefore, the lance should always be held in such a position that it will be able to attack with the least possible movement. In addition, the ring should be six feet high from the ground, but as a rule, each person who wishes to run should first determine the height of the ring, which should be such that the rider can touch the ring with the tips of his fingers, so that in this state the runner will be more accustomed to running with a high lance, so that when he comes to meet it, either in the lance or in the open field, he will easily strike the head, which is the most important place for injury.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/197|4|lbl=183.4|p=1}} {{pagetb|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf|198|lbl=184|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>'''T'''he lance must be ten feet in length, and the ''calce'' up to the handle must be one foot and a quarter in length, so that it is comfortable. Finally, the ''calce'' should be made thick so that its circumference at the handle is six ounces.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/200|1|lbl=186.1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And because this activity of riding with a lance is primarily a matter of knowing how to ride a horse, because almost everything depends on it, even though this is the profession of a rider, we will speak of it here in sufficient detail.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/200|2|lbl=186.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It is therefore necessary for the rider to know the nature of the horse on which he is going to ride; that is to say, whether it is going to be easy or difficult. When it is easy, it will not be necessary for him to spur it, since it will almost by itself take flight from the bridle. But when the horse is difficult, the Cavalier can bring his legs close together in such a way that with every little movement he can push him to move, but he will do this so cautiously that those around him will not notice. And in order to drive the horse away with the hands, it is necessary to know that for those horses that are submissive with their head, the hand should be brought so far forward that it reaches the top of the neck; for those that have their head up, the hand that holds the bridle should be lowered. But it is necessary to take care that the Cavalier’s will is not so great that the horse runs so far forward on the back of the horse’s shoulder as this is very ugly to see. [In this case] one must flee in every way possible, and this is all the more harmful when one is running to meet the enemy, because one is making a target of the enemy’s left parts: one is disabling the lance; as well as many errors, which one can run into from here: and the Cavalier, in order to appear more handsome and more graceful on horseback, will keep his body straight and will not sit comfortably on the horse: and will turn his sight to pass through the middle of the horse’s ears: And, tightening his knees, he will let his legs fall perpendicularly and naturally: and in this state he will bar them, showing such strength with his foot in the plane, that the point of it is at the right of the horse’s shoulder; and that it does not descend to the bottom, nor aim upwards.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/200|3|lbl=186.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/201|1|lbl=187.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And the Cavalier will divide his carriage into five parts; and these divisions he will have to keep distinct in his imagination, and in the operation they will be linked together in such a way that those around him will not be able to distinguish them for this operation; that is to say; in raising the lance, in gathering, in declining, in attacking, and in reaping.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/201|2|lbl=187.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>When the Cavagliero is ready in his position, he will first raise his lance from his thigh,and then spur his horse: and in the first part, which he will have done, he will raise his lance from his thigh in the manner we have said, and in the second part he will raise his arm, which will form an angle. When he is at the level of the shoulder, in the third part, he will stop the lance by lowering it: in the second part, he will make sure that the lance is struck at the end of the descent; in the fifth part, in the same way, he will pick up the lance on the thigh.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/201|3|lbl=187.3|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/202|1|lbl=188.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>The Cavalier, armed only with his armour, may also first practise running on foot, and in this way he will have a good pulse: and as soon as he is ready, he will surely mount his horse, running either on the ring or on the gauntlet, after which he will be able to break every lance.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/202|2|lbl=188.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>Once he has shown that he knows how to run with every reason, in order to prove himself practical and skillful, he will proceed in several ways: such as with an open lance, and from behind, putting the ''calce'' of the lance in his left hand. When he breaks the lance, it may sometimes be done in the air with a jolt, or by the back of the neck, or by putting it on his shoulder in the opposite direction, or by throwing it back into its original place, or by taking it by the ''calce'', and breaking it from top to bottom.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/202|3|lbl=188.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It is also customary to break the lances on the ground, which is too ordinary a method, or in the quintain. In the quintain (to say this a little more), in order that it may have more truthfulness, a man made of wood is pretended to be on horseback, and on a cart, so that when he moves, the Cavalier is better able to run to meet him.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/202|4|lbl=188.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/203|1|lbl=189.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>For this quintain exercise, the lynchpin is to be set up, which will be two hundred feet long and five feet high: the counter-lynchpin is also to be set up, which will be fifty feet long and two and a half feet high from the ground; and it is to be turned inwards towards the lynchpin, so that it is not struck when the legs are stretched out to beat the horse; that is to say, the distance above is to be three and a half feet and four feet below.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/203|2|lbl=189.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>And in order that a few lances may be broken in the practice, to save money, the trunk of the lance may be made four feet long, with a pipe at the top, well adapted, and made in such a way that the other part of the lance, six feet long, may be fitted into it.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/203|3|lbl=189.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>It should also be remembered that, when running across an open field, one should take care not to strike the horse with the left spur, so that it does not escape the impact, and to clench one’s fist, so that the spear does not choke one’s hand, when it happens that the spear rises up and is crushed by the blow.</p> | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/203|4|lbl=189.4|p=1}} {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/204|1|lbl=190.1|p=1}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | | ||
+ | | <p>For the last warning, I also say that when one runs, not for fun, but for duty, with a softened iron, one should know that, on coming up against the enemy, he should lean his horse against him in order to attack him; and this in a straight line, as much as possible: and he should strike in the left side; or he should nail the thigh, which is the most unarmed part.</p> | ||
+ | | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/204|2|lbl=190.2}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |- | ||
+ | | class="noline" | | ||
+ | | class="noline" | <p>'''The End.'''</p> | ||
+ | | class="noline" | {{section|Page:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) 1587.pdf/204|3|lbl=190.3}} | ||
+ | |||
+ | |} | ||
+ | {{master subsection end}} | ||
{{master end}} | {{master end}} | ||
Line 1,414: | Line 3,465: | ||
{{sourcebox | {{sourcebox | ||
| work = Translation | | work = Translation | ||
− | | authors = [[Nicola Boyd]] | + | | authors = [[translator::Nicola Boyd]] |
− | | source link = | + | | source link = https://wiktenauer.com/images/3/31/Rules_of_many_knightly_armies_%28Nicola_Boyd%29.pdf |
− | | source title= '' | + | | source title= ''Rules of many knightly armies'' |
| license = noncommercial | | license = noncommercial | ||
}} | }} |
Latest revision as of 00:45, 29 March 2024
Federico Ghisliero | |
---|---|
Died | 1619 Turino |
Occupation | Soldier |
Citizenship | Bologna |
Influences | |
Genres | Fencing manual |
Language | Italian |
Notable work(s) | Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (1587) |
Manuscript(s) | M.A.M. Ghisliero MS (1585) |
Concordance by | Michael Chidester |
Translations | Alternate English translation |
Federico Ghisliero (Ghislieri; d. 1619) was a Bolognese soldier and fencer. Little is know about his early life, but he came from a Bolognese family and studied fencing under Silvio Piccolomini.[1] He lead a long military career that included serving under the famous commander Alessandro, Duke of Parma, in Flanders in 1582. He was also a friend of Galileo Galilei and a prolific writer, though unfortunately most of his writings were destroyed in a fire at the University of Turin in 1904.[2]
In 1587, he published a fencing treatise called Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii ("Rules for Many Knightly Exercises"); two versions of the book exist, and it's unclear which was created first. One is dedicated to Antonio Pio Bonello, a well-known soldier and distant relative of Ghisliero, and the other to Ranuccio Farnese, who was 18 years old at the time and Alessandro's heir.[2]
Ghisliero's treatise is notable for his use of geometry in relation to fencing, using concentric circles centered on where the fencer has placed most of their weight (often, but not always, the back foot), and sometimes including multiple versions of each figure in an illustration to show the progression of the movements he describes. He also seems to be the first author to reference the Vitruvian Man in a fencing treatise.[3] However, his treatise is unique in that it was printed without any illustrations at all, and they had to be drawn in by hand. It's unclear whether this indicates that he intended to have printing plates made but was unable to do so, or that his plan from the start was to have the books vary based on how much art each buyer was willing to pay for.
Ghisliero died in Turino in 1619.[2]
Contents
- 1 Treatise
- 1.1 Introduction
- 1.2 Theory
- 1.3 Practice
- 1.4 Advertisements of the Sword and Dagger
- 1.5 Advertisements of the Single Sword
- 1.6 Treatise on the Sword and Cloak
- 1.7 Treatise on the Buckler
- 1.8 Treatise Against a Left-Handed Person
- 1.9 Combat at the Barriers
- 1.10 Treatise of a Fighter on Foot Against a Fighter on Horseback
- 1.11 Treatise of One on Horseback Against Another on Horseback
- 1.12 Copyright and License Summary
- 2 Additional Resources
- 3 References
Treatise
The illustrations in this presentation are based on the copy in the Bibliothèque nationale de France, but a few have been modified by Michael Chidester to include additional details present in the Biblioteca Universitaria di Bologna's copy in order to offer a single point of reference for the descriptions in the text. The unmodified illustrations can be viewed in the gallery on the treatise page.
Images |
Transcription | |
---|---|---|
Advertisements of the Sword and Dagger If we want to use our first guard, there are five ways in which we could go against this posture: but all will be in vain if we operate according to reason and the knowledge of the weapon. |
[133.1] AVERTIMENTI DI SPADA, ET PUGNALE. Volendo noi metterci nella nostra prima guardia, potrebbe il contrario in cinque modi operare contra la detta postura: ma tutto farà in vano, se noi operaremo secondo la ragione, et la scientia del givoco. | |
In the first way, he will try to approach from a distance, and with speed he will move his sword across, in order to attack with his dagger. But this is remedied by attacking the enemy in motion, before he reaches the distance. In addition, with every little movement we raise our sword, we will put it into the attack in a straight line. Moreover, we shall pass with our left foot and attack with our dagger. |
[133.2] NEl primo modo cercherà di accostarsi nella distantia; & con velocità s’aventerà alla apada cóla sua al traverso, per ferire col pugnale. Ma à questo si rimedia col ferire il nemico in moto, avanti che arrivi alla distantia. Oltra di questo con ogni poco moto alzando la nostra spada, la metteremo nella ferita in linea retta. Di più passaremo col manco piede, & feriremo col pugnale. | |
In the second way, he will study the opposite of going to the sword, in order to attack with the reversed blow: but this is remedied by centring with the right foot: because in this way he will not be allowed to approach: so that in those movements we will be able to attack him; and supposing that he were to dig out the reversed attack, we will drive our sword in a straight line, with the body in profile, thus cutting that line. |
[133.3] Nel secondo modo, studiarà il contrario d’andare alla spada, per ferire di ponta riversa: ma à questo si rimedia facendo centro col diritto piede: perche cosi non se li permetterà l’avicinarsi: avenga che in quei suoi moti lo potremo ferire; & presupposto, che egli cavasse la ferita riversa, noi cacciaremo la [134.1] nostra spada in linea retta, col corpo in profilo, che cosi segaremo quella linea. | |
In the third way, with the low sword tilting, the apposite will be done by the inquartata: and therefore we will move tilting above; and with the dagger we will hold back the sword so that it does not rise. |
[134.2] Nel terzo modo, con la spada bassa giostrando, il contrario farà l’inquartata: & perciò noi si moveremo giostrando per di sopra; & col pugnale riteneremo la spada che non monti. | |
In the fourth way, he will do the opposite, flowing up the sword by the middle, not to attack, but to drive out the punta riversa, which is remedied in the same way. |
[134.3] Nel quarto modo farà il contrario montare la spada per mezo, non per ferire: ma per cacciare la punta riversa, àche siu rimedia con l’istesso modo detto. | |
In the fifth way, he will put the point of the sword in his fist to prevent it from descending. We will not allow this if we are attacked immediately after the enemy’s sword reaches our body, but if we assume that the sword is already in our fist, we will make a little sign of retreat with the fist of the sword alone, because if he puts the sword back in that motion we will attack him. |
[134.4] Nel quinto modo, metterà il contrario la punta della spada nel pugno, per impedirla: accioche non descenda. A questo non consentiremo, se subio, che la spada nemica ci mostra il corpo, feriremo: ma presupposto, che già la spada sia messa nel nostro pugno, faremo un poco di segno di ritirata, solo col pugno della spada: perche s’egli rimetterà la spada in quel moto lo feriremo. | |
If, in presenting himself, a man is deceived or disconcerted, he must withdraw by drawing a circular slash which cleaves the ground: and then, having recognized himself, he must recover. |
[134.5] Se nell’appresentarsi l’huomo si fosse ingannato, ò si fosse sconcertato, deue ritirarsi tirando un riverso circolare, il quale fenda la terra: & poi riconosciutosi si debbe rimettere. | |
When the sword is impeded, one must yield to that force; and attack by that movement which the same force causes to be made, and this way of operating in arms is most perfect. |
[134.6] Quando si fente impedita la spada, si deue cedere à quella forza; & ferire di quel moto, che l’istessa forza fa fare, & questo modo di operare nell’ armi è perfettissimo. | |
If the enemy counterattacks, we must also counterattack, and hence the latter has the advantage. |
[134.7] Se il nemico contrapassa, bisogna che noi parimente contrapassiamo: & di quà il secódo hà avantaggio. | |
Since it is possible to attack with four fingers of the sword, we do not want or need to overdo it: because the first attack must be made while fleeing, especially when the enemy has a dagger. |
[135.1] Potendosi ferire con quattro dita di spada, non dbisogna voler soprafare: perche la prima ferita va fatta fuggendo, massime quando il nemico haurà il pugnale. | |
In all attacks, the length of the body should be taken first, and then the movement of the feet should be added; and care should be taken to ensure that the point is fast enough in reach to attack. |
[135.2] In tutte le ferite si farà prima la lunghezza del corpo; & poi si soggiungerà col moto de i piedi; & si procurerà, che il punto sia veloce per arrivarsi alla ferita. | |
Each time the dagger parries our attacks, we will repeat the blows, which will help us to strike the dagger; that is, we will not violate our arm from its natural position. |
[135.3] Ogni volta, che il pugnale pararà le nostre ferite, rifaremo le percosse; le quali ci aiuterà à fare la battuta del pugnale; cioè; noi non violentaremo il nostro braccio dal suo naturale. | |
Whenever we agree with our posture, if the enemy withdraws (which is mostly the case), we will lower our weapons and begin the fight again in the same way: and if we seem to be on our guard, we will reduce the enemy as much as we can, putting him in need. |
[135.4] Ogni volta, che accommetteremo con la nostra postura, se il nemico si ritirasse (ilche intraviene per lo più) noi abbassando l’armi di nuovo ricomminciaremo la zuffa col nostro medesimo modo: & se pure ci parerà di stare in guardia, anderemo restringendo il nemico, quanto più potremo, mettendolo in necessità. |
Images |
Transcription | |
---|---|---|
Advertisements of the single sword Whenever the sword is engaged, it can be freed by withdrawing the left foot to the rear, and if the other side attacks it, it will be attacked at the same time. |
[136.1] AVERTIMENTI DI SPADA SOLA. OGni volta, che s’habbia la spada impegnata, ella potrà liberarsi ritirando il piede manco adietro: & se il contrario ferisse, in quel tempo medesimo si ferirà. | |
If, by pulling on an attack, we come to half a sword, we will free ours; if we hold it inward, we will pull it upward, piercing the attack: and with our left hand we will catch the opposite sword in its hilt. But if we have it on the other side, we will take it out from underneath, drawing it into the angle formed by the two swords with our left arm crossed in defense; and we will attack with the point of the sword’s fist[146] upwards. |
[136.2] Se tirandosi qualche ferita, si venisse à meza spada, liberaremo la nostra; se la teniremo di dentro, col tirarla per di sopra, piantando la ferita: & con la mano manca prenderemo la spada contraria nelli suoi fornimenti. Ma se l’hauremo per di duori, la caveremo per di sotto, cacciandosi dentro nell’angolo constituito dalle due spade col nostro braccio manco traversato alla difesa; & feriremo di punta col pugno della spada all’in su. |
Images |
Transcription | |
---|---|---|
Treatise on the sword and cloak[147] When we use the cloak for defense, we must always remember that it differs from the dagger in that it can be cut and pierced, which is not the case with the dagger, and therefore we will never parry with the cloak in the same way as with the dagger. And just as the dagger cannot be used to parry stabbings, so the cloak cannot be used to parry them. And since we try to keep the dagger free from injury, the cloak cannot be kept in the hands of the enemy. |
[137.1] TRATTATO DI SPADA, ET CAPPA SEmpre, che si seruiremo della cappa per difesa, consideraremo che quella hà differenza dal pugnale: perche l’istessa può eser tagliata, & forata; ilche non aviene al pugnale: & perciò non pararemo mai con la cappa, nel modo istesso, come si faria col pugnale: & si come le coltellate col pugnale non si parano, cosi con la cappa non ei potra risistere à quelli: & poiche si cerca di tenere il pugnale libero dall’offese; consi la cappa nó si doura tener sottoposta al nemico. | |
All the same reasons, and all the ways, which we have said above of the single sword, and of the sword accompanied by the dagger, serve us with the sword and cloak: and of this there is no other use, than to impede the enemy; so that he may not have so easy an attack; and to cover the parts below. |
[137.2] Tutte le medesime ragioni, & tutti I modi, c’habbiamo detto di sopra di spada sola; & di spada accompagnata dal pugnale, ci seruono con la spada, & cappa: & di questo non si cava altr’utile, che d’impedire il nemico; affine, che’egli non hab- [138.1] bia cosi facile la ferita; & di coprire le parti da basso. | |
And yes, as we close the return of the enemy sword with the hand at this time when we are attacked by the points, so with the cloak we can better achieve our goal. |
[138.2] Et si come con la mano chiudiamo all’hora il ritorno alla spada nemica, quando uscendo coi punti feriamo; cosi con la cappa operando meglio otteniamo il nostro fine. | |
And because when the man is without a cloak he can be harmed and defended against in two ways: one is to throw it [the cloak] into his face and the other is to throw it over his sword at its debole; this [latter] is an easier way than the first. Therefore it [the cloak] will be taken with the flat hand and with the thumb only; and with a semicircular outward movement it will be collected in the fist, and united a man can take advantage of it at his pleasure and also deprive himself of it in order to come to grips with it. |
[138.3] Et perche con la cappa privandosi di questa l’huomo, in due modi si puo al contrario nuocere, & impedirlo: l’uno è il getarfliela nel viso: l’altro il buttar gliela sopra la spada nel suo più debole terzo; modo più facile del primp; perciò essa si piglierà con la mano piana, & col dito pollice solo; & tutta con un semicircolo per di fuori si raccoglierà nel pugno: accioche unita possa l’huomo à suo piacere, & seruirsene; & anchora privarsene per venire alle prese. | |
Hence it may be understood that the same order must be followed in drawing the sword, and in turning the cloak into the fist, as is done with the sword and dagger, and that this must be done without giving the enemy any idea of his [the man’s] own will. This is to be done by proceeding with the sword down and the cloak out from the body, with caution, and distinguishing what the enemy will do, who, either stationary or in motion, will have to take advantage of it. |
[138.4] Di quì può comprendersi, che s’haurà da tenere il me disimo ordine in cacciar mano alla spada, & in volgersi Ia cappa al pugno: come si fà nel modo di spada, & pugnale: & questo s’haurà da fare senza dar intentione al nemico dela sua volontà: ilche sarà col procedere con la spada bassa, & con la cappa fuori del corpo, accommettendo con cautela; & distinguendo quello, che farà il nemico, ilquale, ò in stato, ò in moto si dourà truovare. | |
If the contrary is found to be the case, it will necessarily be in one of the acts, which we have already mentioned, but against those we will use one of those offenses, which we have declared above. |
[138.5] Se si truoverà in stato il contrario, forzosamente sarà in uno de gl’atti, c’habbiamo già detto, però con- [139.1] tra quelli useremo una di quelle offese, che di sopra habbiamo dichiarato. | |
And if the same opponent holds his sword in front of him, we shall fight against him in the manner already indicated, but holding his cloak in front of him, we shall always use our natural motion with our straight hand; with cuts and points we shall nevertheless attack that fist facing away from the cloak and away from the enemy’s sword. |
[139.2] Etr se il medesimo contrario terrà la spada avanti, contra essa combatteremo co’modi già detti: ma egli tenendo la cappa avanti, sempre di moto nostro naturale à man diritta; con tagli & punte feriremo tuttavia quwl pugno volto dalla cappa, discostandosi dalla spada del nemico. | |
If, however, we find our opponent in motion, we shall act against him in accordance with the proportions of the attacks he inflicts: and, being either by cutting or by thrusting, we shall do the same offences and defences as if we had no cloak, except when we wish to parry, which we shall always do, not with the sword alone, but with the sword accompanied by the cloak, and in the second half we shall attack the right opposite sides. |
[139.3] Se poi peraventura noi truovassimo il nostro contrario in moto, noi operaremo contra lui, conforme alla proportione della ferita, che egli operasse: & essendo ò di taglio, ò di punta, l’istesse offese, & le difese, faremo, come se non havessimo la cappa: eccetto quando vorremo parare: che questo sempre non con la spada sola; ma con la spada accompagnata dalla cappa faremo, & di secondo tempo feriremo alle parti contrarie diritte. | |
If, then, we wish to wait for the enemy, we shall ascertain which foot he will use to move forward, and we shall try to do so with the other foot, different from the one used for the purpose. For if he moves forward with his right foot, we shall move forward with our left foot, and if he moves forward with his left foot, we shall do the same with our right foot. |
[139.4] Caso poi, che noi volessimo aspettare il nemico, avertiremo con qual piede egli si truoverà avanti: & noi si prefentaremo, con l’altro differente all’apposito: come, s’egli si truoverà col diritto avanti, noi col manco si metteremo all’incontro, s’egli col manco, & noi col diritto il simil faremo. | |
Acknowledging, that when the contrary is found with the right ahead, and that we with the left oppose it will then be with the intention of allowing all attacks to pass through; and to attack in the downward direction, with the accompaniment of the cloak. |
[139.5] Avertendo, che quando il contrario si truoverà col diritto avanti, & che noi col manco si opporremo sarà all’hora con intentione di lasciar passare [140.1] tutte le ferite; & di ferire nella declinatione, con l’accompagnamento di cappa. | |
And if we stand with the left hand in front of us, and we stand with the right, then we will immediately parry with the hand, attacking the legs or the right arm or the punta riversa. |
[140.2] Et stando il contrario col manco avanti; & noi col diritto, subito opponendoci col manco poi pararemo, ferendo alle gambe overo al braccio diritto, overo di punta riversa. | |
In this case we will be able to parry the cuts with our cloak alone, because we will parry the enemy’s rise [of his sword] with our own [parry] in the first third of the sword, before it is declines in strength. |
[140.3] In questo caso potremo parare i tagli con la cappa sola: perche con la cresciuta del nemico, & con la nostra pararemo nel primo terzo della spada, avanti che sia in declinatione in forza. | |
We must remedy the enemy’s attack with our sword, so that we can be sure of the attack outside of this tempo: and if we were to attack the enemy by chance at that time, it would be drawn in part, where the enemy’s cloak would entangle and impede our sword so that we would not recover it in time. Therefore, by securing ourselves against the enemy’s attack, we shall attack him secondarily in his right parts. |
[140.4] Si deue rimediare alla percossa nemica, con la nostra spada: accioche fuori di questa occasione si potiamo assicurare di tal ferita: & se ferissimo per ventura in quel tempo, per lo più si tirarebbe in parte, dove la cappa del nemico intricarebbe, & impedirebbe la nostra spada in modo, che non la riscoteressimo in tempo. Assicurando dunque noi stessi dalla ferita del nemico, lo feriremo di secondo tempo nelle sue parti diritte. | |
In order to wait for the opposite, we shall place ourselves in this guard, which is shown below; that is to say, with the left foot forward in a half step, with the weight on the right leg, and with the sword across - then the point of is above our head with the fist at the level of the left shoulder and with the flat of the left hand wrapped in the cloak, and in the first strong point of the sword. |
[140.5] Per aspettare poi il contrario, si metteremo in questa guardia, che quì di sotto si vede; cioè; col piede manco avanti in mezo passo, col peso sopra la base diritta, & con la spada traversale; la punta della quale superi il nostro capo; col pugno à livello della spalla manca, & con la mano [141.1] manca piana, involta nella cappa, & nel forte primo della spada messa. | |
In this posture, the enemy’s sword is always held inwards; and when he pulls, whatever he wishes, to make a strong attack (be it by a cut or a point), he is stronger with his left foot alone: and when he extends that line, he attacks himself, helping the sword with the strength of his left hand. As this figure demonstrates. |
[141.2] In questa postura si terrà sempre la spada nemica dominata in dentro; & tirando egli qual si voglia forte di ferita (sia ò di taglio, ò di punta) solo col manco piede si crescerà in passo sforzato: & distendendo quella linea si ferirà, con l’aiutar la spada con la forza della mano manca. Come dimostra questa figura. | |
If, however, we allow the enemy to pass with a right hand, the respondent, taking advantage of this point of view will be able to make a mortal wound, leaving behind his cloak, which will close the way for the enemy’s sword. |
[142.1] CAso poi che si concedesse, che il contrario passasse à mno diritta, il rispondente seruendosi del punto della prospettiua haurà da ferire d’imbroccatta, lasciando la cappa; la qual chiuda il ritorno alla spada del nemico. | |
If, while we are in this posture, the enemy does not resolve to attack us, but, putting himself on guard, waits until we are the first to attack; and if he stands with his foot straight forward, and with his sword in front of him, we with the stringeremo[148] posture will hold him, wounding him with the same attack. |
[142.2] Se mentre, che noi si truoveremo in detta postura, il nemica non si risoluerà à ferircil; ma mettendosi an ch’egli in guardia aspettarà, che noi siamo I primi à ferire; & esso si truoverà col pie diritto avanti; & con la spada in presentia, noi con la medesima postura lo stringeremo, ferendolo sempre con l’istessa ferita. | |
If, however, he should try with his left foot to strike our sword with his cloak, we shall return with our left foot to the centre, and go out to the first of the four guards we have proposed; and with that fist we shall attack with the point or the cut, or above, passing the point and entering the face. |
[142.3] Ma se col manco piede posto avanti cercasse il contrario d’adombrarci la nostra spada con la sua cappa, noi all’hora ritornado col manco piede nel centro, usciremo nella prima nostra guardia, tra le quattro c’habbiamo proposte; & à quel pugno di punta, overo di taglio feriremo: ò per di sopra, passando con la punta entreremo nel viso. |
Images |
Transcription | |
---|---|---|
Treatise on the Buckler Many people have used the buckler in the same way as a dagger, and they have used it as a parry, accompanying it with the sword. However, since it is difficult for a man to show what he is capable of by means of some instrument, if he does not first make known what it belongs to, it is necessary, in order not to be mistaken, for them to know the quality and properties of the very instrument with which he intends to represent that essence. Since, therefore, we have to deal with the defensive instrument (as I said), we will begin by discussing it in this way. |
[144.1] TRATTATO DEL BROCCHIERO. EStato da molti adoperato il brocchiero nella guisa, che si farebbe un pugnale; é con esso háno parato, accompagnandolo con la spada; ma perche difficilméte può l’huomo mostrar qual che facultà col mezo di qualche instrumento, se prima non si fà conoscere ciò appartenente, bosogna per ogni via, affine di non incorrere in errore, che essi conoschino la qualità, & pro prietà del medesimo instrumento, col quale s’intende di rappresentare quell’essetto. Havendosi dunque da trattare del brocchiero instrumento (come dissi) difensivo, cosi prenderemo il principio di trattarne. | |
The buckler is a spherical, dense and opaque body, and in order for it to do its work properly, its surface must be less than a foot in diameter, since most men are a foot and a half wide: And because the effect of the buckler is to resist the sword, so that it cannot injure our body; since with this sword man can form different and infinite lines, which by similarity we can resemble the rays of the sun (a spherical and luminous body). Therefore we must know that there are two opaque bodies, that is to say, transparent: as are air, water and fire. |
[144.2] Il brocchiero è corpo sferico, denso, & opaco: & affine ch’egli faccia bene l’offitio suo, sarà nella curua superficie difuori di diametro d’un piede: atteso che per il piú gli huomini sono larghi un piede, & mezo: & perche l’effetto del brocchiero è di risi- [145.1] stere alla spada, accioche non possa ferire il nostro corpo; poiche con essa spada l’huomo può formare diverse, & infinite linee: le quali per similitudine potiamo assomigliare à i raggi del Sole, corpo sferi co, & luminoso: perciò debbiamo sapere, che due sono i corpi opaco; cioè, trasparente: come sono l’aere, l’acqua, & il fuoco. | |
Therefore perspective, as we read in the fourth proposition of the first part of the common perspective, wants a spherical, dense, opaque and consequently shadowy body to be considered in three ways with respect to another spherical, luminous and resplendent body. |
[145.2] Onde i prospettivi, si come si legge nella vigefima quarta propositione della prima parte della prospettiva commune, vogliono, ch’un corpo sferico, denso, & opaco, & conseguentemente ombroso, in tre modi possa esser considerato, rispetto ad un’altro corpo sferico, luminoso, & risplendente. | |
In the first way it will be considered, when the shadowy body is greater than the luminous body,; for then they will desire and demand that the said shadowy body will cause and cast a shadow, which, the farther it extends, the more it will grow larger and larger, as is shown in the following figure, in which the luminous body is understood as A, the shadowy as B, and the shadowed as C. |
[145.3] Nel primo modo si considerarà, quando il corpo ombroso sarà maggiore del corpo luminoso: che all’hora vogliono, & pruovano, che il detto corpo ombroso verrà à causare, & mandare un’ombra, la quale quanto più lontano si distenderà, tanto più sempre s’allargherà, come se ne vede l’essempio nella seguente figura; nella quale il corpo luminoso sarà inteso per l’A, l’ombroso per il B, & l’ombra per il C. | |
In the second, it must be considered that the spherical shadowed body is of the same size as the luminous one, and that the shadowed body will always send out a shadow of equal width to its diameter, and that the shadow may extend as far as one wishes, as we can clearly see in the following figure. |
[146.1] Nel secondo s’haurà da considerare, che il corpo sferico ombroso sia della medesima grandezza, ch’è il luminoso: & all’hora ombroso manderà sempre l’ombra di ugual larghezza al suo diamentro: estendasi quanto si voglia in lungo l’ombra: come potiamo manifestamente vedere nella figura, che segue. | |
Lastly, in the third way, we may consider that the spherical shadowy body is smaller than the luminous one, and that the shadowy one is thus to cause and send a shadow, which, the longer it extends, the more it shrinks until it finally ends in sharpness and ends in a point from which a pyramidal figure emerges, the extreme point of which is called the Cone. This experience shows us the following figure. |
[146.2] Ultimamente nel terzo modo si può considerare, che il corpo sferico ombroso sia minore del luminoso: & che cosi l’ombroso sia per causare, & mandare un’ombra, la quale, quanto più s’estenderà in lungo, tanto più si anderà restringendo fino à tanto, che ultimamente ella finisca in acutezza, & termini in un punto, dal qual risulti una figura piramidale: la punta estrema della quale si chiama Cono. Questa esperienza ci mostra la seguente figura. | |
Of all these ways, the first is the one which we will use with the buckler: because it is a spherical, opaque body, greater than the spherical, luminous body, or greater than the fist of the hand; from which, like the rays of the sun, arise the proportions of the lines which man forms with the sword, we will oppose it in such a way that it will cast a shadow, by which we will be covered and defended. |
[146.3] Di tutti questi modi il primo è quello, del quale noi si seruiremo col Brocchiero: perche essendo egli cor- [147.1] po sferico, opaco, maggiore del corpo sferico luminoso, ò maggiore del pugno della mano; dal quale, à guisa de raggi del Sole, sorgono le proportioni delle linee, le quali forma l’huomo con la spada, opporremo quello in modo, che manderà un’ombra, dalla quale noi saremo coperti, & difesi. | |
However, we shall note that on this occasion the sword will have the opposite effect, specifically in a straight line or in power; i.e. in an oblique line. When it is in a straight line, we shall regard it as a single ray of the Sun, and we shall oppose it with the at the same point; but when it is oblique to our body, we shall oppose it using the buckler at the body of the fist at the origin of the ray, or of the line, so that we will be covered by the shadow of the opaque body of the buckler. |
[147.2] DIstingveremo nondimeno in questa occasione, che il contrario overò haurà la spada in atto nella linea retta; overo in potenza cioè; in linea obliqua: quádo l’haurà in linea retta, questa consideraremo, come un raggio solo del Sole: & à quello nel punto istesso opporremo il Brocchiero: ma quando l’haurà obliqua al nostro corpo, opporremo il Brocchiero al corpo del pugno, come ad origine del raggio. Overo della linea: che cosi saremo coperti dall’ombra del corpo opaco del Brocchiero. | |
And just as many straight lines, which come from a centre, the further they move away from that centre, the more they dilate among themselves: so, that if we use the buckler to oppose the sword, either the sword will get stuck in it, or it will cut it, so that it will move further away from its centre and from our body. |
[147.3] Et si come molte linee rette, le quali vengono tutte da un centro, quanto più si allontanano da esso cétro, tanto più dilatano fra se medesime: cosi opponendo noi il Brocchiero alla spada, ò quella in esso s’intopperà, ò quello segarà: ond’ella più si allontanarà dal suo centro, & dal nostro corpo. | |
It will therefore be held in the hand with the thumb resting on it: so that this part does not fall inwards: otherwise our body would be exposed and offended: and so that it will always operate as a blurred body, we will hold it with the arm outstretched: so that the greater shadow will be caused by its distance from our body. |
[147.4] Si terrà dunque in mano col deto pollice messo per [148.1] appoggio: accioche quella parte non ceda in dentro: ch’altramente facendosi il nostro corpo verrebbe discoperto, & offeso: & accioche sempre operi, come corpo sfecrio, lo terremo col braccio disteso: onde venga causata per l’allontananza d’esso dal nostro corpo l’ombra maggiore. | |
So that with this, as with all other kinds of defensive weapons, we shall operate by committing ourselves, without giving the enemy any intention of our will: distinguishing that the enemy will either be in motion or in a stationary state of mind. |
[148.2] Di modo, che con questo si come con tutte l’altre sorti d’arme difensive, operaremo accommettendo, senza date intentione al nemico della nostra volontà: distinguendo, che il nemico, overo sarà in moto, overo sarà in stato. | |
If the enemy is in motion, he will either use a slash or a thrust: we shall make the same parries and attacks to these slashes as we have said; but when we parry them with the buckler, we shall proceed with the accompanied arms; and we shall follow the centre of the fist and counterattack with the left foot. |
[148.3] Se sarà in moto, ò tirerà di taglio, ò di punta: alle quali percosse di taglio, faremo l’istesse parate, & ferite; come habbiamo detto; ma parandole col Brocchiero, procederemo con l’arme accompagnate; & seguitaremo il centro del pugno, & col manco piede contrapasseremo. | |
I leave it to say that we may injure before, during and after tempo in the same manner as we have said in the treatise on the sword and dagger, but we must always put the buckler behind the fist of our sword, stretching out the arm and body, and covering ourselves with it. |
[148.4] Lascio di dire, che potremo ferire avanti tempo, & nel tempo, & dopò il tempo, con gl’istessi modi: come habbiamo detto nel trattato di spada, & pugnale: ma avertiremo di mettere sempre il Brocchiero appresso il pugno nostro della spada, distendendo bene il braccio, & il corpo; & coprendoci sotto à questo medesimo. | |
If the opponent thrusts with the point, he can make the same attacks and parries that have already been said; but since things can easily be moved while they are in motion, the same defence can be made with the buckler as if it were a dagger. |
[148.5] Se il contrario tirasse di punta, potrassi fare l’istesse ferite, & parate, che già si sono dette: ma perche alle cose, mentre che sono in moto, facilmente s’ag- [149.1] giunge nuovo moto, però si potrà far col Brocchiero l’istessa difesa, come se fosse un pugnale. | |
When the enemy is stationary, he may have his sword in front of him or behind him; if he has it in front of him or parallel with the ground in a straight line or at an angle. |
[149.2] Quando poi il nemico si tuova in stato, ò haurà la spada avanti in presentia, ò adietro: se l’hautà avanti in presentia, ò la terra in linea retta, ò in obliqua. | |
We shall oppose the buckler at the extreme point of each line, which will be high, and we shall pierce it underneath with our greatest length and in the same stroke. |
[149.3] A tutte le proportioni di linee, che saranno alte, noi gli opporremo nel punto suo estremo il Brocchiero; & feriremo per di sotto, con la nostra maggior lunghezza, & in una istessa battuta. | |
We shall oppose all straight lines which are at the right of the centre of our body (as in the case of the third and fourth guards) with the buckler at the extremity of the line; and above we shall put our sword to attack in a straight line. |
[149.4] A tutte le linee rette in presentia, le quali si truovano al diritto del centro del nostro corpo (come quando sono in guardia terza, & quarta) si opporrà il Brocchiero nel suo estremo; & per di sopra metterassi la nostra spada nella ferita in linea retta. | |
If, on the other hand, he holds his sword at an angle to our body, he will place the scabbard against his fist; and with the same stroke he will attack the nearest place above.
|
[149.5] Se il contrario terrà la spada in presentia obliqua al nostro corpo, si metterà il Brocchiero opposto al pugno; & con la medesima battuta si ferirà per di sopra al luoco più vicino. | |
If the opposite party holds the sword at an angle, the same offence will be carried out as if we had the dagger, helping the enemy’s sword to its inclination. |
[149.6] Caso, che il contrario tenesse la spada angolare, si farà l’istessa offesa, come se noi havessimo il pugnale, aiutando la spada del nemico alla sua inclinatione. | |
If we make the opposite move with the sword to the rear, we will seek out the enemy’s body in the aforesaid manner, and we will hold the buckler above our body in order to strike it, as if it were a dagger, thus necessitating the opposite sword to pass through it. |
[149.7] Mentre poiche truovaremo il contrario con la spada adietro, cercaremo il corpo nemico nel modo detto; & terremo il Brocchiero suori del nostro corpo per battere, come se fosse un pugnale, necessitando la spada contraria à passar per quello. | |
When we have stopped our opponent with our left foot in front and the buckler has been placed in front of us, we will, in our natural right hand, once we have arrived at a distance, and with our body in a dark position, seek out the enemy, moving away from his sword, and with our circles we will move the sword around the buckler, and then, arriving at the plane of our shoulder, we will throw our points upwards; and if he raises his buckler, we will do so below. |
[150.1] Tuttavolta, che col manco piede avanti si fermasse il nostro contrario; & c’havesse il Brocchiero avanti posto, di moto nostro diritto naturale, arrivati in distantia, & col corpo in scurzo, cercaremo il nemico, allontanandoci dalla sua spada, & co’circoli andaremo có la spada intorno al Brocchiero, é poi in arrivando al piano della nostra spalla, cacciaremo le punteper di sopra; & se quello alzarà il Brocchiero, per si sotto. | |
We may also place the point of our sword in the centre of the enemy’s scabbard, who may be certain to lower it in order to see the sword, and at the same time to wound himself by walking with the point in his face. |
[150.2] Potrassi anchora mettere la punta della nostra spada nel centro del Brocchiero del nemico, il quale si può tener certo, che vorrà abbassarlo, affine di veder detta spada: & in quel medesimo tempo si ferirà, caminandosi con quella punta nel viso. | |
For the sake of greater intelligence I have placed this figure here so that one may see the effect of the lines when they cut into the buckler. |
[150.3] Per maggior intelligenza hò messo quì questa figura accioche si vega l’essetto che fanno le linee quando segano il brocchiero. | |
Images |
Transcription | |
---|---|---|
Treatise Against a Left-Handed Person[149] All the arguments of the single sword; of the sword and dagger; of the cloak; and of the buckler, serve the left-handed against the right-handed; as well as the right-handed against the left-handed. And the weapon of defence can serve no other purpose than to parry the blows, which are thrown from afar; & to close the line: because, when the right-handed man is fighting the left-handed man, both have their swords on one side and their bodies placed in such a way that all the points of their swords strike at an angle, so that they cannot be parried with a defensive weapon, and therefore they must be parried with the sword, since the weakness of the left-handed man’s sword will pass through the strength of the right-handed man’s sword. |
[151.1] TRATTATO CONTRA UN MANCINO. TUTTE le ragioni dette di spada sola; di spada é pugnale; di cappa; & di Brocchiero, seruono cosi al Mancino contra al diritto; come al diritto contra al Mancino: & dell’arme da difesa non potia mo seruirsi in altro, che in parare le botte, che di lontano sono tirate; & per chiudere il camino: perche venendo alla pugna il diritto contra al mancino tutti due hanno la spada da una parte, & il dcorpo posto in modo, che tutte le punte feriscono angolarmente: & perciò con l’arme difensiue non si possono parare, onde conuerrà, che con la spada si parino: atteso che il debole della spada del mancino passarà per il forte della spada del diritto. | |
Therefore, the right-handed sword should be held in such a way that it dominates the left-handed sword inwards; and with the body in profile and the good edge, it should drive the points to the nearest place to be attacked. |
[151.2] Terrà dunque la spada il diritto in stato, che domini la spada del mancino in dentro; & col corpo in profilo, & col filo buono si caccierà le punte al più prossimo luoco da ferire. | |
The right hand will never injure the left-hander from the inside; but if he is not in motion, he can be injured at that time. |
[152.3] Il diritto mai non ferirà per di dentro al mancino; saluo se egli non fosse in moto, che in tal tempo si potrà ferire. | |
The right-handed [person] must distinguish whether the left-handed person will hold his sword forward or backward; and will act against the left-handed person in the aforesaid manner; that is to say, dominating the sword when it moves forward, giving the left-handed person the power to attack in tempo; and when it moves backward, he will fight with his body ready to make the same attack, closing the way to the enemy’s sword with his defensive weapons. |
[152.1] Haurà da distinguere il diritto, se il mancino terrà la spada avanti, ò adietro; & operarà contra à quella col modo detto; cioè; dominando la spada, quando ella si truoverà avanti, dando il moto al mancino per ferire nel tempo; & quando si truoverà adietro, combatterà col corpo pronto à far l’istessa ferita, chiudendo il camino alla spada del nemico con l’arme difensive. | |
The right hand will allow all cuts to pass through, and will wound after the time of the slash; or it will help him to decline, and will attack backwards: it will also be able to parry covered, and will make all the same attacks, that we have said, that are made before the tempo. |
[152.2] A tutti i tagli il diritto lascierà passarli; & ferirà doppo il tempo di fendente; overo gli aiuterà alla declinatione, & ferirà di riverso: si potrà anchora parare coperto, & farà tutte l’istesse firite, che noi habbiamo detto, che si fanno avanti il tempo. |
Images |
Transcription | |
---|---|---|
Treatise of a Fighter on Foot Against a Fighter on Horseback If a man on foot wishes to fight against a man fighting on horseback, he must act in accordance with the nature of the horse, which, being formed of a single body on four legs, has the natural movement of walking along the right side, and walking with any other kind of movement, that movement will be the centre of the legs in front of it. |
[172.2] TRATTATO D’UN COMBATTENTE A PIEDI CONTRA UNO A CAVALLO VOlendo l’huomo à piedi contrastare contro uno, che combatta á cavallo, conviene, ch’egli operi conforme alla natura del cavallo, il quale essendo formato di corpo lúgo sopra quattro basi, hà per moto naturale il caminare per il diritto: & caminando con ogn’altra sorte di moto, quel moto li sarà centro delle basi davanti. | |
It is therefore natural for all animals to flee from things which are harmful to their good being (since they are moved by the concupiscent power which nature grants them for this purpose), whence it follows that the horse, when struck in some part of its body, yields on the same side in order to escape from the offence: And if there be any offence in the flanks by the spurs, when, nevertheless, he is struck in another part of the body, which is nobler than the flanks, with greater offence than the spurs, he will yield on that side, in which he will receive greater offence. |
[172.3] Essendo dunque naturale di tutti gli animali il fuggir le cose, ch’apportano danno al ben’essere loro (percioche sono mossi dalla concupisceuole potenza, à [173.1] questo fine conceduta loro dalla natura) di quì nasce, che il Cavallo percosso in qualche parte del corpo, cede da quell’istessa banda per allontanarsi dall’offesa: & se neme sarà offesa ne’fiáchi da gli sproni, quando nondimeno egli sarà percosso in un’altra parte del corpo, che de’fianchi sia più nobile, con maggior offesa di quella, che fanno gli sproni, cederà da quella parte, nella quale riceverà maggior offesa. | |
The enemy, therefore, when he is on horseback, will try to strike the opposite side, putting the horse to flight; or he will try to take away the right hand of the horse in order to attack it with his sword. But he who fights on foot will seek to flee from that side with his own right hand, in order to get away from the enemy’s attack, and to approach the opposite side, as this figure shows. |
[173.2] Il nemico dunque poso à cavallo cercherà di urtare il contrario, mettendo il cavallo in fuga: overo cercherà di levare al medesimo la mano diritta, per poterlo ferire con la sua spada. Ma colui, che combatterà à piedi, chercherà di fuggir quella parte, col & dalla sua propria diritta, affine d’allontanarsi dalla ferita nemica, & approssimarsi al contrario: come dimostra questa figura. | |
In the same way, since the horse will never be able to strike us with its natural motion except by its right, we will always have to ride to the horse’s right: thus we will prevent the enemy from seeing us, who will be on horseback: and standing in mid-step, and united in strength, and placed with the sword outstretched, out of our body, and with the cloak drawn in the fist, so that, if we can deprive ourselves of it, we shall, as soon as the horse is at a distance, make a cut in the horse’s muzzle, or a thrust in the same place, passing from the right foot, followed by the left foot, to our right sides, and attacking the reins with a transverse blow. Then, placing ourselves in the middle of the circumference, which forms the horse in the state in which a circle is drawn around its body, we will stand here without more condemning the enemy, but continuously attacking either the horse or the man. |
[175.1] PArimente, perche il cavallo non potrà mai se non per il diritto urtarci di moto suo naturale, avertiremo di presentarci sempre al diritto del cavallo: che cosi impediremo la vista al nemico, il qual si truoverà à cavallo: & fermi in mezo passo, & uniti in forza, & posti có la spada distesa, fuori del nostro corpo, & có la cappa imbracciata nel pugno in modo, che bisognando se ne potiamo privare, subito, che il cavallo arriverà in distantia, tiraremo un taglio nel muso d’esso cavallo, overo una púta in quel medesimo tépo, passádo dal piede diritto, seguito dal manco alle nostre parti diritte, & ferendo d’un riverso traversale nelle redini. Poi mettédosi nel cétro della circonferenza, che forma il cavallo in stato, quádo có un circolo si firi il suo corpo, qui staremo séza più abbádonar il nemico, có ferir di cótinuo ò il cavallo, ò l’huomo. | |
It will also be possible to frighten the horse when it is at a distance with the cloak, or to pull it over the head, making the same passes and attacks. |
[175.2] Potrassi anchora in quel tempo, che il cavallo arriverà in distanza, spaventarlo có la cappa; overo tirarglie la sopra la testa, col far l’istesse passate, & ferite. | |
It will also be necessary to use the left hand on the bridle, or with the same hand to leverage his foot, and thus to dismount him. |
[175.3] S’avertirà ancho di dar della mano manca nella briglia; overo con la medesima mano dargli lieva sotto il suo piede; & cosi scavalcarlo. | |
And if the horse should pass against him, it will be necessary to make a cut in the bridle. |
[175.4] Et caso, che il cavallo contra passasse, se gli doverà all’hora tirare un taglio à i garetti. |
For further information, including transcription and translation notes, see the discussion page.
Work | Author(s) | Source | License |
---|---|---|---|
Images | Bibliothèque nationale de France | ||
Translation | Nicola Boyd | Rules of many knightly armies | |
Transcription | Nicola Boyd | Index:Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii (Federico Ghisliero) |
Additional Resources
The following is a list of publications containing scans, transcriptions, and translations relevant to this article, as well as published peer-reviewed research.
- Anglo, Sydney (1994). "Sixteenth-century Italian drawings in Federico Ghisliero's Regole di molti cavagliereschi essercitii." Apollo 140(393): 29-36.
- Gotti, Roberto (2023). "The Dynamic Sphere: Thesis on the Third State of the Vitruvian Man." Martial Culture and Historical Martial Arts in Europe and Asia: 93-147. Ed. by Daniel Jaquet; Hing Chao; Loretta Kim. Springer.
References
- ↑ Mentioned on p. +ⅱ of his dedication to Ranuccio and again on p. 94.
- ↑ 2.0 2.1 2.2 Anglo 1994, p. 30.
- ↑ See pp. 7-9. See also Gotti 2023, pp. 130-133.
- ↑ 4.0 4.1 Cavagliereschi is Corsican for "chivalrous", while the Italian is "knightly".
- ↑ La gratia is Catalan for "grace".
- ↑ Ghisliero is telling his reader that he is a soldier not a civilian swordsman, so it will have a different perspective to others, hence his later comments on siege craft. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ This and the previous paragraph are commending the work to the patron, justifying the work’s existence and its purpose, common in treatises of the period. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ It was common to refer to “ancients” in the justification of the art of swordsmanship. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ When ‘this art’ or ‘the art’ is referenced it means the art of fencing. [More expansively the ars militari (military arts) or for the more classical, the Arts of Mars, of which swordsmanship falls within.] [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Further justification by demonstration of the benefits to those who practice the art in question, also common, especially referring to defense of the person and the realm. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ The version dedicated to Antonino instead reads "...for the instruction of the Most Illustrious Lord Antonio Pio Bonello".
- ↑ Cavalier – cavaliere – knights – so indicating the noble nature of the art which he is presenting. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ The Humours.
- ↑ Means sad.
- ↑ Means calm.
- ↑ Means optimistic.
- ↑ Means bad-tempered.
- ↑ Hot-tempered.
- ↑ Moti has a number of meanings in modern Italian aside from "motion", including "motorcycle, bike, watercraft, riot, scooter".
- ↑ The use of square brackets [] shows the insertion of the translator to aid in clarity of meaning throughout the document.
- ↑ Contextually, transportar is in modern Italian trasporto and has been translated such.
- ↑ Where the word operante which means the operator or the person taking action or more simply the will is used elsewhere, I translate it to fencer as operator has the wrong connotations in English for what Ghisliaro appears to wish to convey.
- ↑ This is an application of Aristotle’s Causes, in some ways more easily explained due to the application of the sword (though this could be my fencer’s brain), especially as it develops. Ghisliero uses seven rather than four as Aristotle does, or at least using the same method of explanation. [Henry Fox]
- ↑ The spelling of secóda is seconda in modern Italian. This shortening of words through the removal of ‘n’ is common in documents of the period.
- ↑ Public roads means the location is a public road.
- ↑ Of Vitruvius’ Ten Books on Architecture. [This same book is referenced in Thibault] [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Or capacity.
- ↑ Flavius Vegetius Renatus' On Roman Military Matters is likely the text to which he is referring. Which was a fourth century commentary on the training of Roman legions harking back to older methods. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Onde is Catalan. It is dove in Italian. Both mean ‘where’ in English.
- ↑ A second century book written by a Roman in the Attica region which encompasses the city of Athens.
- ↑ Dodrans is a Latin contraction of de-quadrans which means “a whole unit less a quarter” or three-quarters.
- ↑ Referencing the ‘ancients’ for authority was commonly used by authors of the time to demonstrate their comprehensive knowledge of the subject. It is intended to add gravitas to the treatise.
- ↑ All’hora is Catalan. Modern Italian is al tempo.
- ↑ The Elder.
- ↑ Scriue is Catalan. Modern Italian is lui scrive.
- ↑ Scurzo, does not translate appropriately from Italian. As with a number of words in Ghisliero’s treatise, it is likely a Catalase word or a unique spelling. Analysis of other treaties such as Jarod Kirby’s Italian Rapier Combat (Kirby, 2004) shows the following two definitions, on page 14 of the text, of a similar sound word that is contextually a more likely approximation of what scurzo means; “Scanso, A voidance, any evasive manoeuvre that moves the body of the direct line” and “Scanso del pie dritto, A voidance made by moving the right foot slightly off the direct line while turning the body.” So for the purposes of this translation, scurzo will mean in this text the middle stance as shown in Figure 3, i.e. a partial voiding stance halfway between perspective and profile.
- ↑ "Perspective" means front facing forward.
- ↑ Also could be interpreted as "figure".
- ↑ George Silver’s theory of the time for the hand and foot from his 1599 text Paradoxes of Defense mirrors this framework. [note from Henry Fox] (Silver, 1599)
- ↑ Et is Latin for ‘and’ in English and e in Italian.
- ↑ This is not an exact translation – it is the best approximation based on context.
- ↑ Balancia translates into ‘balance’.
- ↑ Membro translates to ‘member’, but in English a better word is limb.
- ↑ ò á mano manca la fontanella directly translates to something like ‘the hand missing the fontanelle’. This made no contextual sense, so it has been translated to ‘from the fountain of the body’ as fonta can mean ‘source’ in modern Italian. In the it states that “Fontánella, a little fountaine. Also a fontanell or cauterie [something to cauterise wounds], or rowling [turning round about, whirling or turning round], used also for the chiefe vein of a man’s body.” (Florio, 1611)
- ↑ ‘Perspective’ is forward facing as can be seen in Figure 3.
- ↑ No good translation found, contextually translating spatio to ‘space’.
- ↑ Polykleitos's Doryphoros is an early example of this position called contrapposto. See https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polykleitos for examples of sculptures with this stance. (Wikipeadia, 2021)
- ↑ Polykleitos wrote a lost treatise called ‘Artistic canons of body proportions’ in 5th Century Greece which provided a reference for standard body proportions. For more information https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Artistic_canons_of_body_proportions (Wikipeadia, 2021)
- ↑ The act or process of passing across, over, or through.
- ↑ Aristotle’s fifth book of the Physica, which considers how motion occurs. “Book V classifies four species of movement, depending on where the opposites are located. Movement categories include quantity (e.g. a change in dimensions, from great to small), quality (as for colours: from pale to dark), place (local movements generally go from up downwards and vice versa), or, more controversially, substance. In fact, substances do not have opposites, so it is inappropriate to say that something properly becomes, from not-man, man: generation and corruption are not kinesis in the full sense.” (Aristotle, Physica (Book 5), (384–322 BC) 2007) “Generally things which come to be, come to be in different ways: (1) by change of shape, as a statue; (2) by addition, as things which grow; (3) by taking away, as the Hermes from the stone; (4) by putting together, as a house; (5) by alteration, as things which ‘turn’ in respect of their material substance.” Book 1, Physica, Aristotle (Aristotle, Physica (Book 1), (384-322 BC) 2007)
- ↑ Change of shape.
- ↑ By addition or by growing.
- ↑ Also taking away or removing.
- ↑ Putting things together or building.
- ↑ Change of material substance or alteration of its substance.
- ↑ “Three kinds of motion - qualitative, quantitative, and local” Book 5, Physica, Aristotle (Aristotle, Physica (Book 5), (384–322 BC) 2007)
- ↑ This same concept is present in Chapter 5 ‘Of tempo’ in Ridolfo Capo Ferro da Cagli’s 1610 publication Gran Simulacro dell'Arte e dell'Uso della Scherma and can be translated into the actions of the fencer undertaking the correct movements - from ward (stillness) to attack or defence (movement) to ward (stillness) again. It propounds that the fencer should always end an action in a ward. The same concept is raised in Angelo Viggiani dal Montone’s 1551 (published 1575) text Lo Schermo d'Angelo Viggiani (Montone, 1575) and Antonio Manciolino’s 1531 Opera Nova (Manciolino, 1531).
- ↑ "Violence" in this instance means outside force or against nature. The same concepts of natural and violent actions are used in Iberian swordsmanship, and they take higher guards to take advantage of this principle. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Springimento is likely Springáre means ‘yarke, kicke or winze’ (Florio, 1611). Which likely means in context a preparation or a marshalling of position prior to deployment.
- ↑ Fighting at the barriers was a form of tournament bout usually performed by armoured combatants in which: a fence, a barrier, was imposed between fencers, combatants fought over the fence, and blows below the waist did not count as tournament points. [note by Henry Fox]
- ↑ Bases mean "legs". I have used "legs" wherever relevant in the translation.
- ↑ “Lacertoi, the arme from the elbow to the pitch of the shoulder. Also the brawne of sinnewes or muskles of a mans armes or legges. Also a Lizard. Also a Muskle because it is like a Lizard. Also a certain disease in a harse amongs the muskles and sinnuewes. Also a fish that grunteth as a Hog. Some have taken it also for a makrell fish.” (Florio, 1611) Thus lacertoi will be translated as the arm from the elbow to the shoulder joint.
- ↑ Keeping the elbow near the body.
- ↑ “Rascetta, the wrist of one’s hand. Also a kind of fine silke-rash.” (Florio, 1611)
- ↑ Direct translation is ‘good blade’.
- ↑ Costa “the back of a knife or weapon.” (Florio, 1611) There isn’t a common English equivalent which is a single word.
- ↑ This is consistent with Giacomo di Grassi’s treatise Ragione di adoprar sicuramente l'Arme (Grassi, 1570) which states that there is more power existing at the circumference of a circle than there is closer to the centre. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Debole refers to the half of the blade from tip of the blade to one third down towards the hilt.
- ↑ Forte refers to the first third of the blade from the hilt to towards the tip.
- ↑ Placing the edge over the debole like this is the basis of the Italian gaining stringere of the sword, or the Spanish atajo. It's used to close and control the line to prevent the opponent from hitting us. [Note by Táriq ibn Jelal ibn Ziyadatallah al-Naysábúrí]
- ↑ Here Ghisliero’s methods conforms to common Italian approaches of defence to: always counter an opponent’s attacks with consideration for returning the attack, always attack with concern for defence, and not attack unless secure against the opponent’s attack. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Justifications for use of the cut seem to be relatively rare in fencing treatise of the time. Ghisliero’s justifications may even be unique. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ The same justification for the thrust is given for the thrust being used by the legionary with the gladius, remaining more covered and it being more deadly than the cut. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Fendente means vertical cut.
- ↑ Traversale – transversal or diagonal cut [sometimes squalembrato for downward or falso if rising] [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Tondo – horizontal cut
- ↑ Dritti – straight/forward [forehand cut, or natural cut, sometimes called mandritta] [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Roversi – reverse [backhand or cross-wise cut] [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ The division for the cuts on most diagrams usually go through the navel, or heart rather than the groin in most treatise of the period. [note from Henry Fox] Gérard Thibault d'Anvers’ 1630 treatise Academie de l'Espée ‘Book 1 – Tableau/Plate 2 – Comparing the ideal figure to a real Figure; Sword Scabbards’ shows the division at the naval (d'Anvers, Academie de l'Espée, 1630) – in the text it is found in the section that begins Pour venir à la Pratique de tout ce qui a efté discouru, or “To come to the Practice of all that has been discussed” (d'Anvers, Academie de l'Espée – Book 1 – Tableau/Plate 1 – Philosophical Discussion; Construction and Mathematics of the Circle; Concerning the Sword: Proper Length and Introduction explanation of the first plate., 1630). Salvator Fabris, in his 1606 text, Sienza e Pratica d’Arme also has an illustration in the section Discorso sopra laprima guardia formata nel cauare la spada del fodero or “Discourse in the first guard formed in pulling the sword from the scabbard” demonstrates the where cuts should be made and these also shows the division at the navel rather than the groin. (Fabris, 1606)
- ↑ Diritto ridoppiato literally means right redoubled or a falso traversale meaning a diagonal rising cut.
- ↑ Stramazzóne means a circular cut where the hand is the centre of rotation for the cut. [Note by Táriq ibn Jelal ibn Ziyadatallah al-Naysábúrí] Florio describes it as ‘Stramazzóne, a downe-right blow. Also a rap, a cuffe or wherret on the cheeke.” (Florio, 1611)
- ↑ ‘Molinello, or Molinelli means a circular cut. [Note by Táriq ibn Jelal ibn Ziyadatallah al-Naysábúrí] As an aside, the Molinello for flags described in Francesco Fernando Alfieri’s 1638 treatise La Bandiera “The molinello is delightful. To perform it comfortably, you should have the standard in your right hand. You complete a full turn above the head, then throw it up in the air, catching it around the middle of the standard as the figure shows. The molinello is then turned towards the rear foot. After several rotations, as the hand becomes fatigued, you should grip the butt of the flag with your other hand and repeat the same lesson, again throwing it in the air as described above.” (Alferi, 1638)
- ↑ ‘World’ is translated from the word Mondo which means “the world, the universe. Also, a Mound or Globe, as Princes hold in their hands. Also, cleane, cleansed, pure, neate, spotlesse, purged. Also, pared, pilled. Also, winnowed, &c. Also, as we say, a world, a multitude or great quantitie.’ (Florio, 1611)
- ↑ Fendente tondo means the upper half of the circle as shown in figure 6B. When speaking of the reverses, he is speaking of the lower half of the circle in figure 6B.
- ↑ ‘Segáre, to sawe. Also to part, to cut or devide through the middle.’ (Florio, 1611)
- ↑ ‘Riversa’ [singular] t de’roversi, which means ‘to turn around, a reversion, reverting, reverse or a backblow. A powering down or overwhelmed’ – in short the riversa is a back-hand. (Florio, 1611) Note how even the cut from the wrist is aided by motion of the body, no doubt using the feet to move the body as the cut is made as well, all in their correct motion, to affect the cut. [Note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Imbroccata means a descending thrust. Stoccata, means a violent thrust ascending or rising. Punta riversa means a reverse thrust with the point of the sword.
- ↑ “Auentáta, a hurling, looke Auentáre.” (Florio, 1611) “Auentáre, to hurle, to fling, to dart or cast with violence. Also, to leape or seaze greedily upon, to souse downe as a hawke, also to fill or puff with winde.” (Florio 1611 Dictionary). Therefore imbroccata aventata or imbroccata aventate means to violently attack using a thrust of the rapier over the dagger.
- ↑ The first two lines on the page are printed, but the second two needed to be drawn in by the artist.
- ↑ Here the page numbers jump from 35 to 38, correcting the error of having two 32s and 33s
- ↑ This is the reason that the direct thrust from the shoulder in a straight line is the longest and most preferable and the reason to learn to thrust straight rather than aiming up toward the head. [Note by Henry Fox]
- ↑ 92.0 92.1 92.2 92.3 92.4 92.5 There is a gap in the text here for a circle to be drawn in.
- ↑ The effect of these causes is the fencer hitting their opponent using the technique. Poor technique means the fencer misses and/or dies.
- ↑ The material causes are the movements of the fencer’s body and sword.
- ↑ The formal cause is how the fencer uses the movements of the material cause.
- ↑ The factual cause is the fencer, with their measurements and proportions, and their ability to perform the material causes.
- ↑ The final cause is the actual technique the fencer is trying to achieve.
- ↑ Measure also often called distance. The measure of something is fluid due to the fencer’s, and their opponent’s, relative proportions in each combat and other considerations regarding weaponry. “The Spanish attempt to make it more certain by using proportionality, measuring against the length of the individual.” [note by Henry Fox] Gérard Thibault d'Anvers 1628 treatise Academie de l'Espée (d'Anvers, Academie de l'Espée, 1630) “…the Distances and Instances (i.e. steps in the process of fighting) to be observed in training (which are the basic foundations and support for all the following parts) proceed from the proportions of Man, therefore without this same awareness, they cannot be duly comprehended, nor practiced with confidence. And the same goes for the Steps and Approaches, short and long, required by the variety of positions in the performance of these Exercises. From which it is apparent that one must begin with a good knowledge of the proportion of limbs and body parts, that one may at least be able to make some reasonable judgement on the reach of each movement, proportionally to the limb, or limbs, on which the movement depends, and from which it must be continued, ended, turned, returned, released, bound, or changed in a thousand different ways.” (d'Anvers, Academie de l'Espée - – Book 1 – Tableau/Plate 1 –Philosophical Discussion; Construction and Mathematics of the Circle; Concerning the Sword: Proper Length and Introduction explanation of the first plate., 1630)
- ↑ Approximately 46 to 50 inches or 117cm to 127cm.
- ↑ Approximately 69 to 75 inches or 175cm to 191cm.
- ↑ Distance can be measured by Time, and Time measured by Distance so in effect one is the other, and every action toward or away from an opponent is measured in both Time and Distance; he seems to say much the same thing further along. [note by Henry Fox]
- ↑ Aristotelian motion is the consideration of “a stillness and motion” and is used by Capo Ferro as a method of reading the opponent in Chapter 5 ‘Of Tempo’ (Cagli’, 1610) [note by Henry Fox]
- ↑ Obligatory motion is the beginning of second intention. The fencer moves in a particular way so that the opponent has to do something in response, and then the fencer can follow on with their plan. [Note by Henry Fox]
- ↑ I will start using tempo from this point on instead of time when describing time as a measure of distance, to differentiate between it and the common use of the word time. Following Ghisliero’s explanation of tempo, it will be easier to use tempo to encapsulate this meaning.
- ↑ Sometimes extended to botta lunga, depending on the author [note by Henry Fox].
- ↑ “Attack into preparation” is what it is called in modern nomenclature, catching the opponent while they are preparing to act. [note by Henry Fox]
- ↑ An action in half-time, because the action is in motion, thus not completed, interrupted. [note by Henry Fox]
- ↑ This is an important note; the sword is extended and the fencer is covered by the extension of the sword in a straight line. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Strongest third of the blade from the hilt toward the middle.
- ↑ Strongest third of the blade from the hilt toward the middle.
- ↑ Note the positions of the weapons relative to one another. This is consistent with the Aristotelian and the Iberian approaches. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ The position of the hand and blade position in this initial stage is vital to the techniques that will follow. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ This appears to be discussing taking the line or stringeri.
- ↑ A “reversed thrust” in this instance.
- ↑ ‘in presentia’ means the sword is on the line of engagement. [Note by Táriq ibn Jelal ibn Ziyadatallah al-Naysábúrí]
- ↑ This explains the advantages of Ghisliero’s guard position, demonstrating that the guard is the foundation of a fencing system. [note by Henry Fox]
- ↑ Punta scavizzata means hollow point.
- ↑ Gobba means hump or hunchback.
- ↑ Puinta riversa is a spelling variation from punta riversa.
- ↑ Incapocchiato does not translate, it suggests the word incapacitate. Incapocchiársi means ‘to become a doult or logger-head, to take a foolish conceite’ (Florio 1611) It might also mean encompassing in modern Italian.
- ↑ Guardia di falcone means "falcon’s guard". This is what the Bolognese authors call guardia alta. [Note by Táriq ibn Jelal ibn Ziyadatallah al-Naysábúrí]
- ↑ Coda longa, & larga or coda lunga e larga means "long and broad tail guard".
- ↑ scanso del corpo means void the body. Basically, these are the body turns we use to take the body off the line of engagement. [Note by Táriq ibn Jelal ibn Ziyadatallah al-Naysábúrí]
- ↑ Inquartata means quartering step. It is a voiding action of the body which closes the inside line.
- ↑ “Long and high tail” guard.
- ↑ The sequence of the combatant should always be ward – blow – ward, or stillness – motion – stillness, it is a common and practical method in quite a few treatises. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Examine di Grassi’s (Grassi, 1570) diagram of the thrust and movement of the arm for an example of this motion. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Nature means their passions.
- ↑ Parate – parade – often later used, especially in smallsword in place of ‘parry’. [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Mezzo mandritto means a half-leg cut.
- ↑ Mezzo riverso means a half-reversed cut.
- ↑ Garatusa is Spanish for thrust. In fencing it is a technique composed of nine movements, and the participation of two and three angles, that they make to [through, from] both parts [locations, sides], from the outside and from the inside, arrojando the sword with force to the sides, and from there they return to raise it [the sword] to wound with a thrust in the face or chest. It is not safe [sure]. (Ghost Sparrow Publications, 2021)
- ↑ Polykleitos's Doryphoros is an early example of this position called contrapposto. See https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polykleitos for examples of sculptures with this stance. (Wikipeadia, 2021)
- ↑ Pili (pilum or pila) was the javelin of which the Romans were armed with two along with their sword. [note by Henry Fox]
- ↑ Cortina means a long wall running level from one bulwark to another.
- ↑ A strada coperta is a close walk or passage made on the top of a counter-scarpe in which the besieged may cover themselves from the enemies (Florio 1610)
- ↑ Archibuseria likely is an alternative spelling of archibugiera, which are a wall with slits, in a fortress, through which a weapon can be fired.
- ↑ Riverso traversale means a transverse or diagonal blow during retreat. “It’s equivalent to a riversa squalembrato or falso manco, depending on whether ascending or descending.” [note from Henry Fox]
- ↑ Imbroccata aventata means a hurling or forceful thrust given over the dagger.
- ↑ Gabionate fortifications or fences made of Gabions – cages or baskets full of earth set with ordinance to hide and defend Cannoniers. (Florio 1611)
- ↑ Trincerone means a large, well-equipped trench.
- ↑ No translation of this word is available.
- ↑ Manca means missing, and probably means back or voided leg.
- ↑ This probably means that the sword has mechanical advantage in a thrusting position.
- ↑ Corda means rope or cord, but in this context means the diameter of the circle.
- ↑ ‘A reference to the ‘sword fist’ is made in Antonio Manciolino’s Opera Nova where it states “Of the narrow iron gate guard. The sixth guard is called “porta di ferro stretta”. In which the body must be arranged diagonally in such fashion that the right shoulder (as is said above) faces the enemy, but both the arms must be stretched out to encounter the enemy, so that the sword arm is extended straight down in the defense of the right knee, and so that the sword fist be near and centered on the aforesaid knee.” (Wiktenauer, 2022) It is then clear that ‘sword’s fist’ means the hand holding the hilt of the sword.
- ↑ Cappa means both cloak and cape (there is no differentiation in Italian). I will use cloak for the purpose of consistency. The Spanish cloak or cape is short compared with what we normally consider to be a cloak. It is usually worn anywhere from below the shoulder blade length to the hip.
- ↑ Stringeremo appears to mean the same as stringere or a drawing close posture. Most commonly used as stringere la spada where using the stronger part of the sword you engage with the weaker part of the opponent’s sword and take the line or advantage so the point of the opponent’s sword can no longer strike you.
- ↑ Ghisliero assumes all fencers are right hand dominant in this treatise and writes as such.
- ↑ Piombo means the part made of lead or can mean to plummet down.
- ↑ Cálce means, a ventplate of a tilting staffe or place to hold it by. (Florio 1611)
- ↑ Passeggio means a walk or turn in a walking.
- ↑ Scalzo means bare-footed or unshod. (Florio 1611)
- ↑ Render pane per focaccia is a proverb which means ‘give bread for cake’ or to render like for like. p105 (Macadam, 1924)
- ↑ Stocco, means a short or arming-sword, a tuck. Also a short bat or truncheon. (Florio 1611)
- ↑ Cétro means ‘a Scepter, a mace of dignity.’ (Florio 1611)
- ↑ I think he is describing a downward bind here and I also think ‘blow’ should be noted here as ‘beat’.
- ↑ The name of a march upon a drum and trumpet in a time of war.
- ↑ Conscia is Latin and means partner or accomplice, which in this case appears to mean the horse. (DictZone, 2022)
- ↑ It is uncertain how an Albanian, which might also be a Stratioti in this case, would hold the lance.
- ↑ Stradiotto means ‘the kind of soldiers that Venitians use, like our Carbines, Freebooters or bootie-halers.’ Stratioti ‘An estradiot was a fighter of the mercenary light cavalry units who fought on European battlefields during the first half of the sixteenth century.’ (https://educalingo.com/en/dic-fr/stradiot accessed 17/10/2021)